Home

EN / ACS350 User`s Manual

1. Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par 3407 SIGNAL1 DIRECT FORM PARAM 0 Signed Unsigned value Unit is selected by parameter 3405 OUTPUT 1 0 0 0 UNIT 1 0 00 Example PI 3 14159 2 0 000 ee ue pispa r rT 3 0 0 0 3 1 4 0 0 0 00 3 14 5 0 00 0 000 3 142 6 0 3 0 65535 0 000 0 0 3 1 7 0 00 3 14 0 000 3 142 BAR METER Bar graph DIRECT Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are identical to the 9 source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by parameter 3401 Hz SIGNAL1 PARAM Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Note Unit selection does not convert values NO UNIT No unit selected 0 A ampere 1 V volt 2 Hz hertz 3 percent 4 s second 5 h hour 6 rpm revolutions per minute 7 kh kilohour 8 C celsius 9 lb ft pounds per foot 10 mA milliampere 11 mV millivolt 12 kW kilowatt 13 WwW watt 14 kWh kilowatt hour 15 F fahrenheit 16 hp horsepower 17 MWh megawatt hour 18 m s meters per second 19 m3 h cubic metres per hour 20 Actual signals and parameters Parameters
2. Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Selects a constant value as process PID controller reference 40 when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL 4012 SETPOINT MIN Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference signal 0 source 4013 SETPOINT MAX Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100 signal source 4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value feedback signal for the ACT1 process PID controller 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by parameter 0 4014 FBK SEL 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Al2 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2 Al2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 0 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analog 100 input is selected as a source for ACT1 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL activation input 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Defines the start limit for the sleep function 0 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function 60 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function 0 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay for the sleep
3. Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the activation input NOT SEL See section Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control on page 122 NOT SEL No sleep function selected 0 DI1 The function is activated deactivated through digital input DI1 1 activation 1 0 deactivation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 4023 PID 7 SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV DI1 INV The function is activated deactivated through inverted digital input D11 1 1 deactivation 0 activation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor speed is below a set 0 level 4023 longer than the sle
4. Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq M TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE 43 TRIG M TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 SEQ PROG Relay output control with sequence programming See parameter 8423 ST1 50 OUT CONTROL MBRK On Off control of a mechanical brake See parameter group 43 MECH BRK 51 CONTROL JOG ACTIVE Jogging function active See parameter 1070 JOGGING SEL 52 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 0 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off 1 0 1s delays for relay output RO Control event JJ Relay status E o on oe 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO 0 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time See figure in parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 1 0 1s 15 ANALOGUE Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through analog output and OUTPUTS output signal processing 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 X X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Defines the minimum value for signal selected with parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL AO minimum and maximum correspond the 1504 MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as follows AO mA 1505 1505 1504 1504 AO conte
5. Frame Dimensions and weights Noise ae IP20 cabinet UL open H1 H2 H3 Ww D Weight Noise level mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib dBA RO 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41 70 2 76 161 6 34 1 2 2 6 lt 30 R1 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41 70 2 76 161 6 34 1 2 2 6 50 62 R2 169 6 65 202 7 95 239 9 41 105 4 13 165 6 50 1 5 3 3 50 62 R3 169 6 65 202 7 95 236 9 29 169 6 65 169 6 65 2 5 5 5 50 62 R4 181 7 13 202 7 95 244 9 61 260 10 24 169 6 65 4 4 9 7 lt 62 00353783 xls G Frame Dimensions and weights Noise Size IP20 NEMA 1 H4 H5 Ww D Weight Noise level mm in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib dBA RO 257 10 12 280 11 02 70 2 76 169 6 65 1 6 3 5 lt 30 R1 257 10 12 280 11 02 70 2 76 169 6 65 1 6 3 5 50 62 R2 257 10 12 282 11 10 105 4 13 169 6 65 1 9 4 2 50 62 R3 260 10 24 299 11 77 169 6 65 177 6 97 3 1 6 8 50 62 R4 270 10 63 320 12 60 260 10 24 177 6 97 5 0 11 0 lt 62 00353783 xls G Symbols 1P20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate 1P20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood Technical data 296
6. max 500 ohm O7 X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen J a E E 2 Al Motor speed reference 0 10 V E 3 GND Analog input circuit common yA J 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA 5 Al2 Not in use by default 0 10 V 6 GND Analog input circuit common E 7 AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA i 273 3 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 IDN Start forward If DI1 DI2 the drive stops 13 DI2 Start reverse 14 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 15 DI4 Constant speed selection 1 Le 16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection 2 X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 19 RONO el 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA Q amp Q 21 DOOUT ye No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND _ 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 2 0 ramp times according to parameters 2202 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter O O Set speed through Al1 1 O Speed 1 1202 O 1 Speed 2 1203 1 1 Speed 3 1204 and 2203 1 ramp times according to parameters 2205 and 2206 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in Application macros 90 Motor Potentiomete
7. Corrected COMM reference REF 100 50 a 1500 rpm 5 E Min limit Cala I 750 rpm e 3 7 a 1 750 rpm Al 50 l 100 Max limit 0 rpm Min limit SA O A A 1500 rpm 0 50 100 COMM Y Correction REF reference Corrected COMM ene REF 100 50 0 A 4 0 rpm 1500 PM p aS Sa 1 AN i Al 0 300 rpm ml ice Max limit Min limit Lo ts TO 750 rpmt Aj zeto A ari AL 100 all Ls A Max limit s a 1200 rpm Min limit l ere i o PEREA NN 1500 rpm O rpm E 4 0 50 100 COMM Corrected REF reference Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 251 Reference correction examples for DCU profile With DCU profile the fieldbus reference type can be Hz rpm or percent In the following examples the reference is in rpm Setting When COMM gt 0 rpm When COMM lt 0 rpm COMM AI1 COMM 1000 Al 50 MAX MIN COMM 1000 Al 50 MAX MIN pericia COMM A REF 150000 750000 0 roar 0 rpm 1500 rpm 7 Max limit 750 rpm 750 rpm eee 1500 rpm 0 rpm Min limit 0 750000 150000 COMM Coronea REF reference os COMM rererence REF 150000 750000 0 A 4 O rpm 1500 rpm a ep io ap iad A A n rem
8. 3AFE68579872 B Dimensions 312 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open uado 7N uoneyejsul jauiged py ZIS owes VrOSE689SAVE Dimensions AA ED ED PADDED ABB Limited Daresbury Park Daresbury Warrington Cheshire WA4 4BT UNITED KINGDOM Telephone 44 1925 741111 Fax 44 1925 741212 3AFE68462401 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE 30 09 2007 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives 8 Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 1 800 HELP 365 Fax 1 262 780 5135 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 Fax 86 10 5821 7618 Internet http www abb com
9. Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipolar current SCR CR S tasa Kohm a F a so a i GR f GND i lt GND GND Tov 10 V GND 10 V Use external power supply L Frequency input If DI5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency input on page 105 for how to set parameters accordingly Electrical installation 41 Connection example of a two wire sensor Hand Auto PID Control and Torque Control macros see pages 91 92 93 respectively use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for these macros show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor X1A 4 20 mA P 5 Al2 Process actual value measurement or reference 6 GND 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 10 GND 24 VDC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding WARNING All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used Electrical installation 42 Procedure 1 Remove the te
10. How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to get help Any 70 How to find out the panel version At power up 70 How to adjust the display contrast Output fs How to switch between local and remote control Any et How to start and stop the drive Any 72 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 72 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Output 73 How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 74 How to select the monitored signals Parameters 75 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants 76 with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 77 How to view faults Fault Logger 78 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 273 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and Date 79 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 82 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 82 How to view backup information Parameter Backup 83 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals 1 O Settings 84 Control panels 70 How t
11. Cooling outlet through top cover 9 EMC filter grounding screw EMC Note Screw is on 2 Mounting holes front for frame size R4 3 Panel cover a Basic Control Panel b Assistant 10 Varistor grounding screw VAR Control Panel c 11 Fieldbus adapter serial communication module 4 Terminal cover or optional potentiometer unit connection MPOT 01 12 1 0 connections 5 Panel connection 13 Input power connection U1 V1 W1 brake resistor 6 Option connection connection BRK BRK and motor connection U2 V2 W2 7 FlashDrop connection waar i 8 Power OK and Fault LEDs see LEDs on page 287 camping piate 15 Clamping plate 16 Clamps Hardware description 22 Overview Connections The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable The diagram shows the default I O connections for the ABB standard macro See chapter Application macros for I O connections for the different macros and chapter Electrical installation for installation in general Control panel RJ 45 Modbus RTU RS 232 Screen O SCR max 500 ohm Output frequency speed 0 Alt AO O O Output frequency reference 0 10 V Hera 0 20 mA Analog input circuit G GND mA GND O Analog output circuit common common 10 Al1 e T Al2 Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA Not in use by
12. 19 O tm il 0 O A oe fa V O lt gt D w 3AFE68577977 A Dimensions 308 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open TERE Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AFE68585619 A Dimensions 309 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 o O ios DN lt 3AFE68586658 A Dimensions 310 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open al gt co B 02 N Rol 18 D a 35 Poa el LJ PS LL a oo o 62 61 9 2 i ry Q o gt ou a t o 1 Y AE Me d 67 S 68 11 002 g 08 02 ry A gt O i E i bee eS D el a Y d m U CO oy B o 4 Y Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AFE68487587 B Dimensions 311 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1
13. LOC 00 OUTPUT FWD A2019 FWD FOO11 FWD ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new SAVE setting by pressing wi If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to the Output mode by pressing EP repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing C gt After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown LOC UPAR EDIT 9910 ID RUN O 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Loc UY 0 0 Hz 0 0 A 0 0 DIR 00 00 MENU _ LOC UALARM ALARM 2019 ID run 00 00 LOC UFAULT FAULT 11 ID RUN FAIL 00 00 Start up contro with I O and ID Run 56 Start up control with I O and ID Run 57 Control panels What this chapter contains The chapter describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields It also instructs in using the panel in control monitoring and changing the settings About control panels Use a control panel to control the ACS350 read status dat
14. Program features Reference trimming 101 In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF 2 MAX 2 Switch 9 Select Switch DIRECT 2 oe ES REF1 Hz rpm F REF2 2 PROPOR 1 max speed Switch REF1 Hz rpm 0 NOT SEL 0 REF2 2 Add BES 9904 4230 Mul Mul max torque SX Xx 4231 TRIM SCALE 4233 1 Switch PID2 ref PID2 PID2 output PID2 act 4232 CORRECTION SRC REF Hz rpm REF2 The drive reference before trimming REF The drive reference after trimming max speed par 2002 or 2001 if the absolute value is greater max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater max torq par 2014 or 2013 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref par 4210 PID2 act par 4214 4221 1 Note Torque reference trimming is only for external reference REF2 2 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1102 3 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 1105 when REF 1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID2 OUTPUT the maximum
15. Task Mode Page How to switch between local and remote control Any 60 How to start and stop the drive Any 60 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 60 How to browse the monitored signals Output 61 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Reference 62 How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 63 How to select the monitored signals Parameter 64 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 273 How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 66 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 66 Control panels 60 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local LOC control LOC shown on the left press 2 a Hz Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT FWD LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE LOC as appropriate before returning to the previous display L O C FWD The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the contr
16. Start up control with I O and ID Run 54 How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run The ID Run should be selected if e vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder is needed Note If motor parameters group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For Basic Control Panel see page 63 and for Assistant Control Panel see page 74 in chapter Control panels The ID Run cannot be performed without a control panel PRE CHECK during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run De couple the motor from the driven equipment If parameter values group 07 OPERATING DATA to group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID
17. 22 ACCEL DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects between the two ramp pairs acceleration deceleration pair 1 and 2 Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 DI5 NOT SEL Ramp pair 1 is used DI1 Digital input DI1 1 ramp pair 2 O ramp pair 1 DI2 See selection D11 DI3 See selection D11 DI4 See selection D11 DI5 See selection D11 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1 2 selection i e control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile NIAJ BR wy rm o SEQ PROG Sequence programming ramp defined by parameter 8422 ST1 RAMP or 8432 18492 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O ramp pair 2 1 ramp pair 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV Actual signals and parameters 187 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Defines the acce
18. CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0009 MOT OVERTEMP Motor temperature is too high Check motor ratings load and cooling 4310 or appears to be too high due Check start up data to excessive load insufficient 0305 bit 8 motor power inadequate Check fault function parameters programmable fault cooling or incorrect start up function 3005 3009 data 3504 Measured motor temperature Check value of fault limit has exceeded fault limit setby Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to parameter 3504 FAULT LIMIT value set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 0010 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected as active Check panel connection 5300 dret for drive has Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 9 ceased communicating Check control panel connector programmable fault Refit control panel in mounting platform function 3002 If drive is external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings 0011 ID RUN FAIL Motor ID Run is not completed Check motor connection FF84 successfully Check start up data group 99 START UP DATA 0305 bit 10 Check maximum speed parameter 2002 lt should be at least 80 of motor nominal speed parameter 9908 Ensure ID run has been performed according to instructions in secti
19. Error value e Error value 3 t Gain Ky 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples 0 10000 ms Time 1 1ms Actual signals and parameters 191 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 2304 ACC Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration compensation In 0 COMPENSATION order to compensate inertia during acceleration a derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller The principle of a derivative action is described for parameter 2303 DERIVATION TIME Note As a general rule set this parameter to the value between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine The speed controller Autotune Run does this automatically see parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN The figure below shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation A A Speed reference Actual speed t gt gt 0 00 600 00 s Time 1 0 01s 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller Instructions OFF Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON Note The m
20. HI par 3203 t 1 Case A A Energized 1 POLLS t 0 gt Case B A EE Energized 1 anm mo 0 E Actual signals and parameters 204 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 0 X x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1 1 0 not selected 3202 SUPERV 1LIMLO Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised signal Supervision limits are defined by 104 parameters 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO and 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI See parameter 3207 SUPERV 1 PARAM X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1 1 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal sele
21. See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Acceleration time 2 is used also as jogging acceleration time See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL 60 0 0 1800 0 s Time 1 0 1s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Defines the deceleration time 2 i e the time required for the speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ with scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED with vector control to zero The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Deceleration time 2 is used also as jogging deceleration time See parameter 1010 JOGGING SEL 60 0 0 1800 0 s Time 1 0 1s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 The function is deactivated during emergency stop During jogging parameter value is set to zero i e linear ramp See 1010 JOGGING SEL 0 0 0 1000 0 s See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 1 01s 2208 EMER DEC TIME Defines the time within the drive is stopped if an emergency stop is activated See parameter 2109 EMER STOP SEL 0 0 1800 0 s Time 1 01s 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL NOT SEL Not selected 0 DI1 Digital input DI1 1 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time 1 Actual signals and parameters Parameters compl
22. Tgr Braking torque No Flux Braking 804 Ty 100 N m al Flux Braking 20 Flux Brakin No Flux Braking t s m f Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz Program features 109 Braking Torque Flux Braking 120 Rated Motor Power 7 5kW O 2 2kw E 0 37 kw 100 80 60 40 20 p f z 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Braking Torque No Flux Braking 120 5 Rated Motor Power 100 O 7 5 kW 2 2 kw 0 37 kw 80 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 f Hz The drive monitors the motor status continuously also during the Flux Braking Therefore Flux Braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed The other benefits of Flux Braking are The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given The function does not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking The cooling of the motor is efficient The stator current of the motor increases during the Flux Braking not the rotor current The stator cools much more efficiently than the rotor Settings Parameter 2602 FLUX BRAKING Program features 110 Flux Optimisation Flux Optimisation reduces the total energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 1 to 10 depending on the load torque and speed Settings Paramet
23. Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can e view and change parameter values start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise y EXIT K by pressing ES repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys ENTER CA and S Y 7 and pressing lt LOC U PAR GROUPS 01 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys A and CY 7 SEL Press wih LOC UPAR GROUPS _99 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys A and SY 7 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter LOC UU PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO INEA IND 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM_VOLT EXIT_ 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify
24. o o oo oooooooo eee 28 Planning electrical installation What this chapter contains 0 000 cee 29 Motor selection perasa corra amp 8 68a ere glee sre Oh Oe Ree bbe Rb Cpe a A does Baca wee 8 29 Table of contents 10 AC power line connection oo 000 eee eee eee 29 Supply disconnecting device 0 eee 29 Thermal overload and short circuit protection 0 00 00 ee 30 Protection against short circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable 30 Protection against short circuit in the motor and motor cable 0002000005 31 Thermal overload protection of the Motor 31 Selecting the power cables 2 00 cc ene es 32 General rules ai AN 32 Alternative power Cable types 0 00 cee eee 32 Motor cable Shields 3 cs4 cent tes Pisano ihn EA a ee Be ade N y 33 Additional US requirements 0 0 0 00 0c cette tees 33 Protecting the relay output contact and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads 34 Residual current device RCD compatibility 0 0 es 34 Selecting the control cables 2 00 eee 34 Relay Cable sica AA Mebane tt e a Mies oh Bea 35 Controlipanel cable nissart eteen a aaa 35 Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I O 1 ees 35 Routing the cables is gsc Gi orb woe wee ode ghee ead He oe eee te de 35 Gontrol cable Qucts siria a eh hae aaa Rae aS ea a Ae S RRA 36 Ele
25. 3626 TIMEDFUNC1SRC _ Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SCR NOT SEL 3627 TIMEDFUNC 2SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 3628 TIMEDFUNC3SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 3629 TIMEDFUNC4SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Process PID PID1 control parameter set 1 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME _ Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller 60 4003 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller 0 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the 1 process PID controller 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and drive NO speed 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for the display parameter 1 selected by parameter 4006 UNITS 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling 0 applied to the PID controller s actual values 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the scaling 100 applied to the PID controller s actual values 4010 SET POINT SEL Selects the source for the process PID controller reference Al signal Actual signals and parameters Parameters short form list 155
26. AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA 72 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 p Start pulse F ole 13 DI2 Stop pulse Y 14 DIS Forward 0 Reverse 1 15 DI4 Constant speed selection 1 L _ 16 DI5 Constant speed selection 1 X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 l19 RONO MS 20 DOSRC A Digital output max 100 mA Q 21 DOOUT lt dey No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp DI3 DI4 Operation parameter Tightening torque 0 5 Num 4 4 Ibf in Set speed through Al1 Speed 1 1202 Speed 2 1203 Speed 3 1204 ajo a jo alui olo Application macros Alternate macro 89 This macro provides an I O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the drive To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Default I O connections 1 10 kohm
27. Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control OO o N O START Starts the drive in local control Control panels Operation 59 You operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the Zas and y 7 arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the 57 key With the 777 key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control and monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks REM OUTPUT 491 MENU PAL FWD The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail
28. Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see chapter Technical data Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic Resets must be activated by the user Settings Parameter Additional information 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings Alarm AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Program features 119 Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Diagnostics Actual Signals Additional information 1401 Supervision status through RO 1805 Supervision status through DO 8425 8426 8435 8436 Sequence programming state change according to supervision 8495 8496 functions Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE Program
29. SAVE Saving in progress 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source for the Start Enable 1 signal Note Functionality of the Start Enable signal is different from the Run Enable signal Example External damper control application using Start Enable and Run Enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop command group 10 i Start Enable signals 1608 and 1609 Relay energized Relay y 9 Started de energized output status group 14 Damper open Damper Damper closed closed Damper Damper gt Damper status opening closing time time Run Enable signal l from the damper end l switch when the l damper is fully opened 1601 Motor speed Motor status gt gt Acceleration Deceleration time 2202 time 2203 NOT SEL NOT SEL Start Enable signal is on DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Start Enable If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated DI2 See selection D11 DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection D11 DI5 See selection D11 oy AJOJN Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 175 Index Name Selectio
30. complete descriptions 207 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq dm3 s cubic decimetres per second 21 bar bar 22 kPa kilopascal 23 GPM gallons per minute 24 PSI pounds per square inch 25 CFM cubic feet per minute 26 ft foot 27 MGD millions of gallons per day 28 inHg inches of mercury 29 FPM feet per minute 30 kb s kilobytes per second 31 kHz kilohertz 32 ohm ohm 33 ppm pulses per minute 34 pps pulses per second 35 l s litres per second 36 l min litres per minute 37 Wh litres per hour 38 m3 s cubic metres per second 39 m3 m cubic meters per minute 40 kg s kilograms per second 41 kg m kilograms per minute 42 kg h kilograms per hour 43 mbar millibar 44 Pa pascal 45 GPS gallons per second 46 gal s gallons per second 47 gal m gallons per minute 48 gal h gallons per hour 49 ft3 s cubic feet per second 50 ft3 m cubic feet per minute 51 ft3 h cubic feet per hour 52 lb s pounds per second 53 lb m pounds per minute 54 Ib h pounds per hour 55 FPS feet per second 56 ft s feet per second 57 inH20 inches of water 58 in wg inches of water gauge 59 ft wg feet on water gauge 60 Ibsi pounds per squared inch 61 Actual signals and parameters 208 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Descrip
31. must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given on page 28 in chapter Mechanical installation and the module manual The communication through the fieldbus link is initialised by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232 The communication parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted See the table below Parameter Alternative settings Setting for fieldbus control Function Information COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 9802 COMM PROT SEL NOT SEL STD MODBUS EXT FBA MODBUS RS232 STD MODBUS with RS 485 MODBUS RS232 with RS 232 Initialises embedded fieldbus communication ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 10 17 5302 EFB STATION 0 65535 Any Defines the station ID address of the RS 232 485 ID link No two stations on line may have the same address 5303 EFB BAUD 1 2 kbit s Defines the communication speed of the RS 232 RATE 2 4 kbit s 485 link 4 8 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 76 8 kbit s 5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 Selects the parity setting The same settings must 8 NONE 2 be used in all on line stations 8 EVEN 1 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Any Selects the communication profile used by the PROFILE DCU PROFILE drive See section Communication profiles on ABB DRV FULL page sa 5310 5317 EFB PAR 0 65535 Any Selects an actual value to be mapped to modbus r
32. 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF this value corresponds to the value of parameter 1104 REF MIN Note MINIMUM Al value must not exceed MAXIMUM Al value 1 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1 0 1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF this value corresponds to the value of parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 100 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 10 mA 20 mA 100 50 1 0 1 Actual signals and parameters 168 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 1303 FILTER Al1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 i e the time within 63 of 0 1 a step change is reached A Unfiltered signal 1
33. 1 gt 0 ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 Additional Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting information 8420 ST1 REF SEL 100 8430 40 8440 50 8450 100 State reference 8421 ST1 START 8431 START 8441 START 8451 START Run direction and stop COMMANDS REV FRW FRW FRW command 8422 ST1 RAMP 10s 8432 60 s 8442 5s 8452 5s Ramp time 8424 ST1 CHANGE 40s 8434 120 s 8444 8454 200 s State change delay DLY 8425 ST1 TRIG TO CHANGE 8435 CHANGE 8445 DI2 8455 ST 2 DLY DLY 8426 ST1 TRIG TO NOT SEL 8436 NOT SEL 8446 NOT SEL 8456 CHANGE State change trigger STN DLY 8427 ST1 STATEN 8437 8447 8457 3 Program features 137 Example 2 Drive is programmed for traverse control with 30 sequences Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1 ST2 error ST1 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 ST2 ST4 acceleration ST8 f y f E v f WE y AMES ias pe San eae T AOS Al1 10 EA ay eee ee a eee Es AM ae eee o penes i ST8 Ald 10 ries Ae eae oe A PA A co A SEB eae ERROR Ali 45 bec Sef ened ences eee Eee Mete STO e AA Sea start Error ST1 Drive is started in forward direction with Al1 Al1 50 50 reference and ramp pair 2 State shifts to the next state when reference is reached All relay and analog outputs are cleared ST2 Drive is accelerated with Al1 15 Al1 65 50 reference and 1 5 s ramp time State shifts to the ne
34. 1200 rpm Max limit Minimit I Al Al l VEASE RO 750 rpm 750 rpm Y f E PS Maxin A e A 1200 rpm 300 a Min limit mpm pam o i en a aia 1500 rpm O rpm gt v 0 750000 150000 COMM Corrected REF reference Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 252 Setting When COMM gt 0 rpm When COMM lt 0 rpm COMM AI1 COMM 1000 AI 50 COMM 1000 Al 50 Corrected COMM RE REF 150000 750000 0 1500 rpm Max limit_ Min limit om TO rpm o ta di O rpm Max limit Min limit fT ds A v 750000 150000 pi Corrected reference Corrected COMM reference REF 150000 750000 0 A 4 O rpm 1500 rpm Jaa 300 rpm 1200 rpm 5 Max limit Al 750 rpm 750 rpmt Ff J 1200 rpm Al 0 _ Min limit 300 rpm O aaao 1500 rpm 0 rpm gt 0 750000 150000 COMM Corrected REF reference Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus reference scaling 253 Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following tables Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selec
35. 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 03x 02A4 2 4 3 2 4 3 6 4 2 0 37 0 5 RO 03x 03A5 2 6 1 3 5 5 3 6 1 0 55 0 75 RO 03x 04A7 2 7 6 4 7 7 1 8 2 0 75 1 R1 03x 06A7 2 11 8 6 7 10 1 11 7 1 1 1 5 R1 03x 07A5 2 12 0 7 5 11 3 13 1 1 5 2 R1 03x 09A8 2 14 3 9 8 14 7 17 2 2 2 3 R2 03x 13A3 2 21 7 13 3 20 0 23 3 3 3 R2 03x 17A6 2 24 8 17 6 26 4 30 8 4 5 R2 03x 24A4 2 41 24 4 36 6 42 7 5 5 7 5 R3 03x 31A0 2 50 31 46 5 54 3 7 5 10 R4 03x 46A2 2 69 46 2 69 32 80 9 11 0 15 R4 3 phase Uy 380 480 V 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 03x 01A2 4 2 2 1 2 1 8 2 1 0 37 0 5 RO 03x 01A9 4 3 6 1 9 2 9 3 3 0 55 0 75 RO 03x 02A4 4 4 1 2 4 3 6 4 2 0 75 1 R1 03x 03A3 4 6 0 3 3 5 0 5 8 1 1 1 5 R1 03x 04A1 4 6 9 4 1 6 2 7 2 1 5 2 R1 03x 05A6 4 9 6 5 6 8 4 9 8 2 2 3 R1 03x 07A3 4 11 6 7 3 11 0 12 8 3 3 R1 03x 08A8 4 13 6 8 8 13 2 15 4 4 5 R1 03x 12A5 4 18 8 12 5 18 8 21 9 5 5 7 5 R3 03x 15A6 4 22 1 15 6 23 4 27 3 7 5 10 R3 03x 23A1 4 30 9 23 1 34 7 40 4 11 15 R3 03x 31A0 4 52 31 46 5 54 3 15 20 R4 03x 38A0 4 61 38 57 66 5 18 5 25 R4 03x 44A0 4 67 44 66 2 77 0 22 0 30 R4 00353783 xls G 1 E EMC filter connected U EMC filter disconnected Metal EMC filter screw is installed in E versions and plastic screw in U versions 2 Preliminary value Technical data 291 Symbols Input hn continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses Output lon continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute eve
36. 50 m 165 ft With output chokes the motor cable length may be extended to 60 m 195 ft for RO and 100 m 330 ft for R1 R4 To comply with the European EMC Directive use the cable lengths specified in the table below for 4 kHz switching frequency The lengths are given for using the drive with the internal EMC filter or an optional external EMC filter 4 kHz switching frequency Internal EMC filter Optional external EMC filter Second environment 30 m 100 ft 30 m 100 ft minimum category C3 1 First environment 30 m 100 ft category C2 1 1 See the new terms in section EC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 301 Technical data Control connections 297 Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Analog output X1A 7 Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 frequency input X1A 16 Relay output X1B 17 19 Digital output X1B 20 21 Wire size Torque Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference value X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Frequency input Input impedance Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Brake resistor connection 0 2 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 10 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 10V 1 max 10 mA R l
37. 54 FBA DATA IN Data from drive to fieldbus controlle 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 Selects data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller 5402 FBA DATA IN 2 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 5410 FBA DATA IN 10 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 55 FBA DATA OUT Data from fieldbus controller to drive 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 Selects data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive 5502 FBA DATA OUT 2 See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 5510 FBA DATA OUT 10 See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 84 SEQUENCE PROG Sequence programming 8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE Enables sequence programming DISABLED 8402 SEQ PROG START Selects the source for the sequence programming activation NOT SEL signal Actual signals and parameters 158 Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE Selects the source for the sequence programming pause signal NOT SEL 8404 SEQ PROG RESET Selects the source for the sequence programming reset signal NOT SEL 8405 SEQ ST FORCE Forces the sequence programming to a selected state STATE1 8406 SEQLOGIC VAL 1 Defines the source for the logic value 1 NOT SEL 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER1 Selects the operation between logic value 1 and 2 NOT SEL 8408 SEQ LOGIC VAL 2 See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL 8409 SEQ LOGIC OPER2 Selects the operation between logi
38. Actual signal Go to state 1 par 8495 State change to state N has a higher priority than state change to the next state 135 Program features 136 Example 1 ST4 Seq start State change trigger Sequence programming is activated by digital input DI1 ST1 Drive is started in reverse direction with 50 Hz reference and 10 s ramp time State 1 is active for 40 s ST2 Drive is accelerated to 20 Hz with 60 s ramp time State 2 is active for 120 s ST3 Drive is accelerated to 25 Hz with 5 s ramp time State 3 is active until the sequence programming is disabled or until booster start is activated by DI2 ST4 Drive is accelerated to 50 Hz with 5 s ramp time State 4 is active for 200 s and after that the state shifts back to state 3 Parameter Setting Additional information 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start stop direction commands for EXT2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation 1106 REF2 SELECT SEQ PROG Sequence programming output as REF2 1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run Enable 2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422 8452 8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE ALWAYS Sequence programming enabled 8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input D11 8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1 INV Sequence programming reset i e reset to state 1 when DI1 signal is lost
39. EXIT 00 00 SAVE LOC UHELP Set as given on the motor nameplate Voltage value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 Control panels 77 Step Action Display 5 e To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter LOC UPAR EDIT SAVE Press Sy 9906 MOTOR_NOM CURR To stop the assistant press P a EXIT 00 00 SAVE Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can e view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC CHANGED PAR menu with keys As and S Y 7 and pressing SS 1202 CONS are 1 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 3 Select the changed parameter on the list with keys As and w_ The LOC UPAR EDIT value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press Su to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1 value 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 S
40. Enables the change of the User Parameter Set through a digital NOT SEL input 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source for the NOT SEL local control mode lock signal 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source for the Start Enable 1 signal NOT SEL 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source for the Start Enable 2 signal NOT SEL 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Activates deactivates alarms NO 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown DEFAULT 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Frequency input and transistor output signal processing 1801 FREQ INPUT MIN Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a 0 frequency input 1802 FREQ INPUT MAX Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 frequency input 1803 FILTER FREQ IN Defines the filter time constant for frequency input 0 1 1804 ITO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO DIGITAL 1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO FAULT 1 1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO 0 1807 DO OFF DELAY Defines the release delay for digital output DO 0 1808 FO CONTENT SEL Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output FO 104 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value 1810 FO CONTENT MAX Defines the maximum frequency
41. NOT SEL NOT SEL No communication 0 STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 485 provided by optional FMBA 01 1 Modbus Adapter connected to drive terminal X3 See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module connected to drive 4 terminal X3 See also parameter group 51 EXT COMM MODULE See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter MODBUS RS232 Embedded fieldbus Interface RS 232 i e control panel connector See 10 chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Actual signals and parameters 238 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 99 START UP DATA Language selection Definition of motor set up data 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH Note With ACS CP D assistant control panel the following languages are available English 0 Chinese 1 and Korean 2 ENGLISH British English Available with ACS CP A and ACS CP L assistant control 0 panels ENGLISH AM American English Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 1 DEUTSCH German Available with ACS CP A and ACS CP L assistant control panels 2 ITALIANO Italian Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 3 ESPA OL Spanish Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 4 PORTUGUES Portuguese Available with ACS CP A assist
42. Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given on page 28 in chapter Mechanical installation and the module manual The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to EXT FBA The adapter specific parameters in group 51 EXT COMM MODULE must also be set See the table below Parameter Alternative Function Information settings Setting for fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 9802 COMM PROT SEL NOT SEL EXT FBA Initialises communication between drive STD MODBUS and fieldbus adapter module EXT FBA MODBUS RS232 ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter module 5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the module manual Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used 5126 FB PAR 26 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 DONE 1 REFRESH Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings Note In adapter module the parameter group number is 1 for 51 EXT COMM MODULE TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION 5401 5410 FBA 0 Defines the data transmitted from drive to DATA IN 1 10 1 6 field
43. nominal torque 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS Data words for monitoring the fieldbus communication read only Each signal is a 16 bit data word Data words are displayed on the panel in hexadecimal format 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 262 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 262 0303 FB STS WORD 1 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 262 0304 FB STS WORD 2 A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile on page 262 0305 FAULT WORD 1 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 DC OVERVOLT Bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP Bit 3 SHORT CIRC Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 DC UNDERVOLT Bit 6 Al1 LOSS Bit 7 Al2 LOSS Bit 8 MOT OVERTEMP Bit 9 PANEL LOSS Bit 10 ID RUN FAIL Bit 11 MOTOR STALL Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 EXT FAULT 1 Bit 14 EXT FAULT 2 Bit 15 EARTH FAULT 0306 FAULT WORD 2 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing Bit 0 UNDERLOAD Bit 1 THERM FAIL Bit 2 3 Reserved Bit 4 CURR MEAS Bit 5 SUPPLY PHASE Bit 6 ENCODER ERR Bit 7 OVERSPEED
44. or by 1 control panel DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Enables the change of the User Parameter Set through a digital input See NOT SEL parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set by parameter 9902 after changing any parameter setting or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User Parameter Sets A setting once made remains despite User Parameter Set change Note Selection of User Parameter Set 2 can be supervised via relay output RO See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 NOT SEL User Parameter Set change is not possible through a digital input Parameter 0 Sets can be changed only from control panel DI1 User Parameter Set control through digital input DI1 Falling edge of digital 1 input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DI1 2 User Parameter Set selection through di
45. 0 DI Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1 Rising edge of digital input DI1 Local control disabled Falling edge of digital input DI1 Local control allowed DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 ON Local control is disabled 7 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock i e control word 0301 FB 8 CMD WORD 1 bit 14 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Local lock through inverted digital input DI1 Rising edge of inverted digital 1 input DI1 Local control allowed Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control disabled DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 Actual signals and parameters 174 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 1607 PARAM SAVE Description Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Note A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection Def FbEq DONE DONE Saving completed
46. 1 1 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus 1 1 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUNTIME Elapsed time counter thousands of hours Runs when the drive is 1 0 01 kh running Counter cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER MWH counter Counter cannot be reset 1 1MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR Motor revolution counter millions of revolutions The counter can be 1 1 Mrev reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in Parameter mode 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI Drive control board power on time in days Counter cannot be reset 1 1 days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO Drive control board power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds Counter cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature Unit depends on the sensor type selected 1 1 by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 0146 MECH ANGLE Calculated mechanical angle 1 1 0147 MECH REVS Mechanical revolutions i e the motor shaft revolutions calculated by the 1 1 encoder 0148 Z PLS DETECTED Encoder zero pulse detector 0 not detected 1 detected 1 1 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS
47. 104 Frequency IN PUL as sawed Roe A eee 105 SOS a Ea tS Scene A O oe eh ote Ae A oe 105 DIAQNMOSTIES sorriem a Ai ed eb Dhak Gaeta Aa oes 105 Transistor Output sai ented a en pa ht Se ee A a a y eR ae amp 105 SONGS a Ce aed ates ie lh died eh cen a aes 105 DlagnoOsues ua A Pita iets eth ee ae athe en ee he eee ie 105 Actual SIGNalS ios eee edie ay ee mare ea Res bee A ek BMA bt pee daw es ad 106 Settings lt 5 sce AN 106 Diagnostics oct Bese eh BRE A ee dhs Dated SS ea SOE ee Ee ee eS 106 Motor identification s eses eae tes Mec nd doe get SRE a seine id gue ea teed 106 SONAS Sse ers puree Bare gine Geach we pub dead WARE wee KRU EE eet ted ease wiles Gas ele 106 Power loss ride through 00 ee 107 SUING ida cau A Ak HRS Ate a ase ct Sten ate hae to aa 107 DC MagnetisSing ii ee oe he a hel Ps ee i ae 107 Settings O a O a A ate to Be oe 107 Maintenance trigger ae nsien ee a e eee 107 Setting Sreser A A O 107 Table of contents DE ale e PAE a A e te o 108 SCUINGS ii e a whee a Deel eet AS a ta ah oe NSi 108 Speed compensated stop 0 0 108 SCUINGS oot ee eee de Ea dees DES Oe ERG PO ee eee ew eee ewes ee eae S 108 FlUx Braking cin ate siete oh Gea dacs ee Oe eae Vata Be de CER Mod ee He etna wee iene eee 108 SOMOS wreak Cay dpe werk NE A E 109 Flux Optimisation vou Duby one eee ale oho Deh ad a de awd Sepa ee we 110 SONNERIE 110 Acceleration and deceleration rampS o occcooc eee 110 SUM Ss A O ANO 110 Criti
48. 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement 8423 8433 8493 AO control with sequence programming Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0124 AO value 0170 AO control values defined by sequence programming Fault PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1503 lt 1502 Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 105 Program features 104 Settings Parameter Additional information Group 10 START STOP DIR DI as start stop direction Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection or reference source Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run Enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 19 TIMER amp COUNTER DI as timer or counter control signal source 2013 2014 DI as torque limit source 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal 2209 DI as zero ramp force signal 3003 DI as external fault source Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS DI in motor temperature measurement 3601 DI as timed function enable sign
49. 20 at the most demanding operating point 5 with nominal torque Torque step rise time lt 10 ms with nominal torque lt 10 ms with nominal torque The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control I Ty T 100 load t s Area lt 1 s NactNref NN Ty rated motor torque ny rated motor speed Nact actual speed Nref speed reference The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the motor shaft The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control 10 l E lt 5 ms Tn rated motor torque Tref torque reference Tact actual torque t s Program features 115 Scalar control It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of vector control In the scalar control mode the drive is controlled with a frequency reference It is recommended to activate the scalar control mode in the following special applications In multimotor drives 1 if the load is not equally shared between the motors 2 if the motors are of different sizes or 3 if the motors are going to be changed after the motor identification Ifthe nominal current of the motor is less than 20 of the nominal output current of the drive In the scalar control mode some standard features are not available Settings Parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE IR compensation for a scala
50. 214783647 speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 1000 1 Final reference limited by 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 2018 torque2 PID 1000 1 Final reference limited by reference 4012 4013 PID set1 or 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 254 Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 START STOP DIR Fieldbus references are bipolar i e they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF1 REF2 Direction determined by the sign of Direction determined by digital command COMM e g digital input control panel par 10 03 R esultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 FORWARD Max ref Max ref Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 00 Ref 1 2 00 163 163 163 163 Max ref Max ref par 10 03 R esultant Resultant DIRECTION REF1 2 REF1 2 REVERSE 7 Max Ref Max Ref 163 163 163 163 Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus 100 ref 1 2 ref 1 2 L Max Ref Max Ref 4 N par 10 03 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION
51. 3012 Motor Thermal Protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor Thermal Protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Motor Motor Break point load current 19 i 100 Motor load curve 100 50 PN Temp t Zero speed load rise Speed 100 a AL Ww t Motor thermal time constant Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 124 Program features 117 Underload Protection Loss of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The drive provides an underload function to protect the machinery and process in such a serious fault condition Supervision limits underload curve and underload time can be chosen as well as the action taken by the drive upon the underload condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3013 3015 Earth Fault Protecti
52. 7703 REF1 SELECT 16 AI1 Al2 See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 17 PID1OUT PID controller 1 output See parameter groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 7 and 19 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 DI4U 5D See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 30 DI4U 5D NC See parameter 1703 REF1 SELECT 31 FREQ INPUT See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 32 SEQ PROG See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 33 Al1 SEQ PROG See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 34 Al2 SEQ PROG See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 35 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 Corresponds to the 0 minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal 1 0 1 torque See example in parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 Corresponds to the 100 maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal 1 0 1 torque See example in parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values See section Constant speeds on page 111 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal DI3 4 NOT SEL No constant speed in use 0 DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 1 digital input DI1 1 active O inactive DI2 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SP
53. 8425 ST1 TRIG 0 TO ST 2 is set to e g Al2 LOW 2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC Activates the cycle counter for sequence programming NOT SEL Example When parameter is set to ST6 TO NEXT the cycle count 0177 SEQ CYCLE CNTR increases every time the state changes from state 6 to state 7 NOT SEL Disabled 0 ST1 TO NEXT From state 1 to state 2 1 ST2 TO NEXT From state 2 to state 3 2 ST3 TO NEXT From state 3 to state 4 3 ST4 TO NEXT From state 4 to state 5 4 ST5 TO NEXT From state 5 to state 6 5 ST6 TO NEXT From state 6 to state 7 6 ST7 TO NEXT From state 7 to state 8 7 ST8 TO NEXT From state 8 to state 1 8 ST1 TON From state 1 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATEN 9 ST2 TON From state 2 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 10 ST3TON From state 3 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 11 ST4 TON From state 4 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 12 ST5TON From state 5 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 13 ST6 TON From state 6 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 14 ST7 TON From state 7 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 15 ST8 TON From state 8 to state n State n is defined by parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N 16 8416 CYCLE CNT RST Selects the source for the cycle counter reset signal 0171 SEQ CYCLE NOT SEL CNTR DI5 INV Reset through invert
54. Dee ea ela ed RGR dee a Puri Powe Dela wad a 283 No master device oia eee wa ee eae AE RA Oo GR EE ea ee pe era ed 283 Same GEvice address usina eh eae as ba dee Abe Dh da See Gwe ness 283 Incorrect WINING serere pereen iie A PE ee See eee se 283 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains 0 0 00 c cee 285 A AN on cath shee toe a deate 285 Maintenance intervals persis maoo i ia E E EE eee 285 HA E E A EA S EAE TNE AA EE ce 285 Fan replacement R1 R4 ocio pda A A a EEE Aa Rue 286 Capacitors eisers ada AE rr ina eh a r lic ALES are tet cs 286 REfORMING x24 badd A A A each AAA AA a ASES e 286 Control panel 1 A ue ey eed A A a a EA 286 A A egg he eaten ede age alpen wad naw Mie ge ein RN 286 Battery ncaa deere A AA NA 287 Table of contents Technical data What this chapter contains o ococoooo eee 289 RAMIS La cei ee tee oe tS eee Oe thay ted dea ie eae ee a ee we Pee i 290 Current and power qieres cis mare hated akc ware de as ie eee vt etwas nie Me wee 290 SYMDOIS Luna md aos data Raed an a at a 291 HIZO Ets rios or A EAS AA 291 Deal AE AAA AAA AA Ree 291 Cooling air flow requirements ooococoooooo eee 292 Power cable sizes and fuses 0 oo 293 Power cables terminal sizes maximum cable diameters and tightening torques 295 Dimensions weights and noise 6 0 ee eee ees 295 SYMDOLS ree ons hts e hee A A oe a a tao 295 Input power connection i s eess
55. Defines the connections and the source for the start stop and INOT SEL direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes the REQUEST direction 1010 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function NOT SEL 11 REFERENCE SELECT Panel reference type external control location selection and external reference sources and limits 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference in local control mode REF 1 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that EXT1 selects between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF Al 1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF 0 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF Eur 50 US 60 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 Al2 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 0 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 100 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed selection and values 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Activates the constant speeds or selects the activation signal DI3 4 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 1 Eur 5 US 6 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 2 Eur 10 US 12 1204 CONST SPEED
56. Earth Fault Protection irsi ripidi iep ba ee wee eee bed ee od eka 117 INCOME CE WIKI re phere Sea A acd a A A ee ese hk ed a se 117 Input phase lOSS a ecos elem ane segs Qe Had epg a HEM alg RE Bd eae ewe bo 117 Pr eprogrammed faultS s posas sac sad oe wes de dae Se GU Gb Ble dew ead wee doe ded ae 117 OVErCUITENE ores eee ok ee dunes dees a ee eae Dee RA 117 DC overvoltage ka Raed Ae be el eee Reed Rd Ba 117 DC ndervoltags n a neesan tan tanith Octane Otte e PE Me E ts At Si Qu ie tat ae daa 117 Drive temperature 118 SHORE circula a a aed e cat e alee chs edhe aR aha Vania 118 Interhalitault rts ating Sa eee eee Med Pe gt Pa a A oe E a E 118 Operation limits e a a eee tte 118 SOMOS oink Gad A pe Awa we de RAO SOROS ea RODE A Cpa Ree ee ese 118 Power limit sos 4nead oo Phe bee Lv ae bs tae ee tay pi tobe ae dale aye saa Sau ee 118 Automaticresets 2 606 088 de ete oie bee de baa ea ede A ea ce bee ee 118 SONGS esena na heated eet A Paha ed Fase ieee tea wae ath ac Aas 118 SUPEIVISIONS axis a a a o n E wank Beach wate Mian Wet Wiel wate ae AA e 119 Settings i assunte atera Teale ned d doe ag aa dls dale Ge gee a 119 Table of contents 14 DANOS O a O Nee eh le 119 Parameter loki e aiaei ene hee hae aoe eben a ben ot Pes a hove ea et 119 o Sean ey ae eee acer eer gree ee oe ee E Pe a ee eae ee ee eae eer oe 119 PID CONtTOl see a ee GR ede Peds e Wes ee Pe A cased A 4 120 Process controller PIDA cuco ee dis e ee ee e
57. I O clamping plate are aligned 7 Fasten the option ground plate to the I O clamping plate with the provided screws 8 Slide the terminal cover back in place Mechanical installation 29 Planning electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when selecting the motor cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive If the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Motor selection Select the 3 phase AC induction motor according to the rating table on page 290 in chapter Technical data The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type AC power line connection Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed AN installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Supply disconnecting device Install a hand operated input disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the Eur
58. MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM setting 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par 3415 SIGNAL3 DIRECT FORM PARAM See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3415 setting 35 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature measurement See section Motor temperature MEAS measurement through the standard I O on page 124 3501 SENSOR TYPE Activates the motor temperature measurement function and selects the NONE sensor type See also parameter group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS NONE The function is inactive 0 1 x PT100 The function is active The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor 1 Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the
59. Modbus Mapping acatar Se wad eh ede 255 Register Mapping maria aa phe we ae ee et Pa Hee ee ee 255 FUNCION CONES 2 c 2 cuted we ly Oboe aha be waa ada 257 Exception CodeS iii Gee dee See be es Se debe ee Gee ee eee ge 257 Communication Profiles cdincde aia Sl hens doh Teach ac dace acd wee Pane he bce wee 258 ABB Drives communication profile 00000 cece eee 258 DCU communication profile 0 0 0c eens 262 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains ooocococcoooo eee 267 System OVGIVIOW as Go he iS Saas O bere eee Vee eee ee bees 267 Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module 0 0 c eee eee 268 Drive control parameters 0 00 0 ee 269 The fieldbus controlintetace i tica A ded Ee at eats Beck ped Rey Wang tame EA WE 270 Communication profile 2 2 0 naen a EAR EE nent eens 271 Fieldbus references cimil Satin PEE Ta TE Bee ea cae 272 Fault tracing What this chapter contains aanse aa eee 273 Safety ii aw is Peeled DER ewes BS eb Bae OL ee Ae as 273 Alarm and fault indications 0 0 0 000 0c cette eee eee 273 HOW TO TES titi ad adn aie ead ido 273 FAUSTO Y ety toe ar A te cotter Ses cde IO te cee cE a a Bes 273 Alarm messages generated by the drive 000 ee 274 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel 276 Fault messages generated by the drive 0 278 Embedded fieldbus taultS mee cc a a
60. OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing 777 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one group 01 491 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM right Page 64 tells how to select up to three signals to output FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step Action Display Te If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page A 1 64 you can browse them in the Output mode REN a Hz To browse the signals forward press key 4 gt repeatedly To browse OUTPUT END them backward press key w_7 repeatedly 0 5 A REM a OUTPUT FWD 107 gt a OUTPUT FWD Control panels 62 Reference mode In the Reference mode you can e set the speed frequency or torque reference start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing _ if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 777 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom REM PA r MENU FWD 2 If the drive is in remote control REM sho
61. OUT CONTROL Selects the relay transistor and analog output control for sequence AO 0 programming state 1 The relay transistor output control must be activated by setting parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1805 DO SIGNAL to SEQ PROG Analog output control must be activated by parameter group 75 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Analog output control values can be monitored with signal 0770 SEQ PROG AO VAL R 0 D 1 AO 0 Relay output is de energized opened transistor output is energized and 0 7 analog output is cleared R 1 D 0 AO 0 Relay output is energized closed transistor output is de energized and 0 6 analog output is cleared R 0 D 0 AO 0 Relay and transistor outputs are de energized opened and analog output 0 5 value is set to zero RO 0 DO 0 Relay and transistor outputs are de energized opened and analog output 0 4 control is frozen to the previously set value RO 1 DO 1 Relay and transistor outputs are energized closed and analog output 0 3 control is frozen to the previously set value Actual signals and parameters 234 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DO 1 Transistor output is energized closed and relay output is de energized 0 2 Analog output control is frozen to the previously set value RO 1 Transistor output is de energized opened and relay output is energized 0 1 Analo
62. OUTPUTS Analog output settings 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings Other At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected Diagnostics Actual values Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp Program features 126 Control of a mechanical brake The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped or not powered Example The figure below shows a brake control application example function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations Note that the frequency converter a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module as defined in IEC 61800 2 is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature such as the brake control function but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations t WARNING Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake control Brake control logic is integrated in Power supply l the
63. REF1 2 REF1 2 REQUEST 7 Direction Command FORWARD Max ref L Max ref 163 Fieldbus 100 dos ref 1 2 100 ret 100 163 163 163 L La Max ref A Max ref eter Direction Command E REVERSE Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depend on the selected function See chapter Actual signals and parameters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Modbus mapping 255 The following modbus function codes are supported by the drive Function Code Hex dec Additional information Read Multiple Holding Registers 03 03 Reads the contents of registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Write Single Holding Register 06 06 Writes to a single register in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Diagnostics 08 08 Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The slave device seri
64. RUN 0 00 200 00 Gain 1 0 01 Actual signals and parameters 190 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 2302 INTEGRATION TIME Description Defines an integration time for the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant y A Controller output Ei Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value t gt Note For automatic setting of the integration time use autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Def FbEq 2 5 0 00 600 00 s Time 1 0 01s 2303 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Controller output
65. Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt Ion 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2078 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2074 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 1607 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown on the left at the top Press key to switch between local and remote control Start up contro with I O and ID Run ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9970 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting by pressing _ If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to the Output mode by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get there Press lt gt to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown 55 LOC 9910 PAR FWD LOC 1 PAR FWD
66. Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive i 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions Planning electrical installation 31 Protection against short circuit in the motor and motor cable The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed Thermal overload protection of the motor According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switche
67. Status of digital inputs Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 0161 PULSE INPUT FREQ Value of frequency input in Hz 1 1 Hz 0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1 RO is energised 0 RO is de energized 1 0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output when transistor output is used as a digital 1 output 0164 TO FREQUENCY Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used as a 1 1 Hz frequency output 0165 TIMER VALUE Timer value of timed start stop See parameter group 19 TIMER amp 1 0 01s COUNTER 0166 COUNTER VALUE Pulse counter value of counter start stop See parameter group 19 1 1 TIMER amp COUNTER 0167 SEQ PROG STS Status Word of the sequence programming 1 1 Bit 0 ENABLED 1 enabled Bit 1 STARTED Bit 2 PAUSED Bit 3 LOGIC VALUE logic operation defined by parameters 8406 8410 0168 SEQ PROG STATE Active state of the sequence programming 1 8 state 1 8 1 1 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals 145 No Name Value Description FbEq 0169 SEQ PROG TIMER Current state time counter of the sequence programming 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL Analog output control values defined by sequence programming See 1 0 1 parameter 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL 0171 SEQ CYCLE CNTR Executed sequence counter of the sequence programming See 1 1 parameters 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC and 8416 CYCLE CNT RST 0172 ABS TORQUE Calculated absolute value of the motor torque in percent of the motor 1 0 1
68. What this chapter contains The chapter instructs how to perform the start up e start stop change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels starting on page 57 How to start up the drive How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have if any Ifyou have no control panel follow the instructions given in section How to start up the drive without a control panel on page 45 e If you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up on page 46 If you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 51 or perform a limited start up see section How to perform the limited start up on page 46 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual How to start up the drive without a control panel SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician N The safety instructions given in
69. are given Categorization according to the frame size The ACS350 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions technical data and dimensional drawings which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the rating table on page 290 in chapter Technical data Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type code and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Drives Sales Support and Service network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Drives Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives then select successively Drives Document Library Manuals feedback form About the manual 20 Installation and commissioning flowchart Task Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 Y Plan the installation select the cables etc Check the ambient conditions ratings and required cooling air flow Unpack and check the drive Y If the drive will be connected to an IT ungrounded or corner grounded system check that the internal EMC filter is
70. communication profile ABB Drives Full communication profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment The ABB Drives Limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface ABB Drives Full profile supports two Control Word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Embedded fieldbus Drive network RS 232 485 ABB DRV FULL LIMITED DCU profile Z ABB Drives profile s Data conversion k MS Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 DCU PROFILE lt DCU profile Control Status Word DCU profile J Data conversion for REF1 2 Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 ABB Drives communication profile Two implementations of the ABB Drives communication profile are available ABB Drives Full and ABB Drives Limited The ABB Drives communication profile is active when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV LIM The Control Word and Status Word for the profile are described below The ABB Drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control Word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS whichever control location is active is set to COMM Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 259 The following table and the state diagram l
71. drive application program The X1B power supply and wirings needs to 230 VAC be done by the user f 17 ROCOM Brake on off control through relay C gt E 18 RONC FAS output RO Gye 7 19 RONO Emergency i _ brake _ z E i de C E j i Motor Mechanical brake Program features 127 Operation time scheme The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function See also section State shifts on page 128 1 4 Start command a _ _ External speed reference Inverter modulating 2 Motor magnetised ae A 2 Open brake command RO DO Internal speed reference actual motor speed output Torque I T Brake open current torque 4302 ima Motor magnetising delay parameter 4305 tod Brake open delay parameter 4301 Nes Brake close speed parameter 4303 fta Mechanical brake close delay Program features 128 State shifts From any state 1 rising edge RFG Ramp Function Generator in the speed control loop reference handling State Symbol NN xyz NN State name X Y Z State outputs operations X 1 Open the brake The relay output set to brake on off control energises Y 1 Forced start The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external Start signal Z 1 Ramp in zero Forces the used speed reference internal to
72. for the speed controller 10 2302 INTEGRATION TIME Defines an integration time for the speed controller 39204 2303 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the speed controller 0 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Defines the derivation time for acceleration deceleration 0 compensation 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Start automatic tuning of the speed controller OFF Actual signals and parameters Parameters short form list 151 Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque control variables 2401 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time 0 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time 0 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL Activates deactivates the critical speeds function OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 1LO Defines the minimum limit for critical speed frequency range 1 0 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Defines the maximum limit for critical speed frequency range 1 0 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 26 MOTOR CONTROL Motor control variables 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Activates deactivates
73. forward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1705 REF1 MAX See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT selection Al1 JOYST for more information Al1 JOY See selection Al2 JOY 0 4 Al2 Analog input Al2 0 3 Al Analog input Al1 0 2 KEYPAD Control panel 0 1 0 0 100 0 Constant speed 8421 ST1 COMMANDS Selects the start stop and direction for state 1 Parameter 1002 EXT2 DRIVE STOP COMMANDS must be set to SEQ PROG Note If change of direction of rotation is required parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST DRIVE STOP Drive coast or ramps to stop depending on parameter 2102 STOP 0 FUNCTION setting START FRW Rotation of direction is fixed to forward If the drive is not already running it is 1 started according to parameter 2101 START FUNCTION settings START REV Rotation of direction is fixed to reverse If the drive is not already running it is 2 started according to parameter 2101 START FUNCTION settings 8422 ST1 RAMP Selects the acceleration deceleration ramp time for sequence programming 0 state 1 i e defines the rate of the reference change 0 2 0 1 Time 1 01s 0 0 1800 0 s When value is set to 0 2 ramp pair 2 is used Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 When value is set to 0 1 ramp pair 1 is used Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 With ramp pair 1 2 parameter 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL must be set to SEQ PROG See also parameters 2202 2207 8423 ST1
74. from zero to a small value with key cAn Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press O to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION DECELERAT Set the minimum speed parameter 2007 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application 49 LOC XXX FWD forward direction reverse direction 71117 Cy y ION TIMES LOC 2001 PAR FWD LOC 2002 PAR FWD LOC 2202 PAR FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run 50 Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Loc 2 2 0 3 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two PAR FWD deceleration times wi
75. function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active Switch Compare Select Output freq 1 NOT SEL Sal INTERNAL 6 elay Mot speed T 1 lt 2 bi And Te a Set Reset 40232 4022 gt ese sent refActive amp 4024 PIDCtriActive S R 1 modulating R Or Compare 5320 B1 4 P 1 2 Or 1 Activate 0132 1 noT seL Select Delay 5320 B2 _ a 1 gt 2 INTERNAL ae 9 a it StartRq lt 1 0 Deactivate 4025 2 DI1 4 gt m sleeping q 4022 4026 Mot speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 1102 PIDCtrlActive 9902 is PID CTRL modulating The inverter IGBT control is operating Program features 123 Example The time scheme below visualises the operation of the sleep function Motor speed A ty Sleep delay parameter 4024 twa Wake up delay parameter 4026 t lt ty y ty Sleep level par 4023 Actual value A Wake up deviation par 4025 Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due
76. increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 6 The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME2 defines the rate of the reference change COMM Fieldbus reference REF 1 COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al See section Reference selection and correction on page 249 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al1 See section 10 Reference selection and correction on page 249 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 11 Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D NC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 12 The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM When the drive is restarted the m
77. lock see parameter 1602 0 PARAMETER LOCK 0 65535 Pass code Setting 358 opens the lock The value reverts back to 0 1 1 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive aftera KEYPAD fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0 DI Reset through digital input DI1 reset by a rising edge of D11 or by control panel DI2 See selection DI1 2 Actual signals and parameters 172 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 START STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input or by control 7 panel Note Do not use this option when start stop and direction commands are received through fieldbus communication COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal i e control word 8 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 262 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 258 DI1 INV Reset through inverted digital input DI1 reset by a falling edge of DI1
78. motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors 2 See selection 1 x PT100 3 x PT100 The function is active Temperature is measured using three Pt 100 sensors 3 See selection 1 x PT100 Actual signals and parameters 210 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection PTC Description The function is active The temperature is supervised using PTC sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature ohm 4000 as Sa es O fee en ards Temperature Resistance Normal O 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4kohm 550 le o A AA T Def FbEq 4 THERM 0 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input O motor overtemperature THER
79. of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Amendment A1 1999 Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods e UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Compliance with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 See page 301 C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagne
80. output FO signal value 1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 10 1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO 0 1 19 TIMER amp COUNTER Timer and counter for start and stop control 1901 TIMER DELAY Defines the time delay for the timer 10 1902 TIMER START Selects the source for the timer start signal NOT SEL 1903 TIMER RESET Selects the source for the timer reset signal NOT SEL 1904 COUNTER ENABLE Selects the source for the counter enable signal DISABLED 1905 COUNTER LIMIT Defines the counter limit 1000 1906 COUNTER INPUT Selects the input signal source for the counter PLS IN DI5 1907 COUNTER RESET Selects the source for the counter reset signal NOT SEL 1908 COUNTER RES VAL Defines the value for the counter after reset 0 1909 COUNT DIVIDER Defines the divider for the pulse counter 0 1910 COUNT DIRECTION Defines the source for the counter direction selection UP 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND Selects the source for the drive start stop command when NOT SEL parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS value is set to COUNTER START COUNTER STOP Actual signals and parameters 150 Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Cus
81. page 112 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 1 1V 2615 USER DEFINED F3 Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2616 USER DEFINED U4 Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency 76 of Uy defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 112 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 1 1V 2617 USER DEFINED F4 Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal to or exceeds 95 of Uy the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ See section Custom Uff ratio on page 112 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 1 1V 29 MAINTENANCE Maintenance triggers TRIG 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time counter Value is 0 compared to parameter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is disabled 1 0 1kh 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter When 0 parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter Va
82. parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N selection LOGIC VAL NOT SEL Logic value 1 no logic comparison 0 AND Logic function AND 1 OR Logic function OR 2 XOR Logic function XOR 3 8408 SEQLOGIC VAL 2 See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL See parameter 8406 8409 SEQ LOGIC OPER 2 Selects the operation between logic value 3 and the result of the first logic NOT SEL operation defined by parameter 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 NOT SEL Logic value 2 no logic comparison 0 AND Logic function AND Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 231 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq OR Logic function OR 2 XOR Logic function XOR 3 8410 SEQLOGIC VAL 3 See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL See parameter 8406 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG 0 TO ST 2 is set to e g Al1 HIGH 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG 0 TO ST 2 is set to e g Al1 LOW 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG 0 TO ST 2 is set to e g Al2 HIGH 1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter
83. parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 94 and then uploaded to panel Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above Copy USER S3 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u3 Download User Set 3 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 66 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display E Go to the Main menu by pressing _ if you are in the Output mode Loc otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom PA ro MENU WD 2 If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key As LOC or
84. possible to manually adjust the controller gain integration time and derivation time or let the drive perform a separate speed controller Autotune Run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN In Autotune Run the speed controller is tuned based on the load and inertia of the motor and the machine The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step typically 1 to 20 n ny L A Undercompensated B Normally tuned autotuning C Normally tuned manually Better dynamic performance than with B D Overcompensated speed controller The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller The controller output is the reference for the torque controller Derivative acceleration compensation gt Proportional Speed Error gt integral s Torque reference value a reference Derivative Calculated actual speed 2 N Settings Parameter groups 23 SPEED CONTROL and 20 LIMITS Diagnostics Actual signal 0102 SPEED Program features 114 Speed control performance figures Torque control performance figures Speed control No pulse With pulse encoder encoder Static accuracy 20 of motor 2 of motor nominal slip nominal slip Dynamic lt 1 s with 100 lt 1 s with 100 accuracy torque step torque step Torque control No pulse encoder With pulse encoder Non linearity 5 with nominal torque
85. reacts to a control panel communication FAULT break 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL 3005 MOT THERM PROT Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is FAULT detected 3006 MOT THERM TIME Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal model 500 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 ZERO 100 SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70 LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 3010 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY Defines the frequency limit for the stall function 20 3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function 20 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload NOT SEL 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME Defines the time limit for the underload function 20 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE Selects the load curve for the underload function 1 3016 SUPPLY PHASE Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss i e when DC FAULT voltage ripple is excessive 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is ENABLE detected in the motor or th
86. reference in rpm Frequency reference Hz if parameter 9904 1 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ REF2 reference 2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects EXT1 between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 EXT1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1703 REF1 SELECT DI1 Digital input DI1 0 EXT1 1 EXT2 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 EXT2 EXT2 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1002 7 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1 EXT2 selection i e control word 8 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB Drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 262 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 258 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1 EXT2 control selection Timed function 1 active EXT2 timed 9 function 1 inactive EXT1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 10 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 11 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 12 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 EXT1 0 EXT2 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 IN
87. state 1 to state 2 8426 ST1 TRIG TO STN Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the state NOT SEL from state 1 to state N 8427 ST1 STATE N Defines the state N See parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO STN STATE 1 8430 ST2 REF SEL See parameters 8420 8427 8497 ST8 STATE N 98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation 9802 COMM PROT SEL Activates the external serial communication NOT SEL 99 START UP DATA Language selection Definition of motor set up data 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects the application macro ABB STANDARD 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage 230 400 or 460 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current 12N 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency Eur 50 US 60 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Type dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power PN 9910 ID RUN Controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run OFF IDMAGN 9912 MOTOR NOM TORQUE Calculated motor nominal torque in Nm 0 9913 MOTOR POLE PAIRS Calculated motor pole pair number 0 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 10 START STOP DIR Description The sources for external start stop and direction control
88. tasks either one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See section Assistants mode on page 76 on how to start the Start up Assistant or other assistants default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application selection Default tasks ABB STANDARD Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals 3 WIRE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals ALTERNATE Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals MOTOR POT Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals HAND AUTO Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT1 Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals PID C
89. the ID Run During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run the nominal speed during the ID Run ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE A WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN 9912 MOTOR NOM Calculated motor nominal torque in N m calculatlon is based on parameter 0 TORQUE 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER and 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED values Read only 1 0 1N m 9913 MOTOR POLE PAIRS Calculated motor pole pair number calculation is based on parameter 9907 0 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED values Read only 1 1 Actual signals and parameters 242 Actual signals and parameters 243 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system via a fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus For fieldbus adapter control see chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transaction is half duplex Embedded fieldbus connection is either RS 232 control panel connector X2 or RS 485 terminal X1 of the optional FMBA Modbus Adapter connected to drive ter
90. the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel communication break FAULT FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to stop 1 CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the speed to the speed 2 defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of A a panel communication break LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the speed to the level 3 the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Not selected 0 DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1 1 Fault trip EXT FAULT 1 1 Motor coasts to stop 0 No external fault DI2 See selection DI1 DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 Actual signals and parameters 197 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI5 See selection DI1 5 DI1 INV External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1 0 Fault trip EXT 1 FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 1 No external fault DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 I
91. the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable see section Selecting the power cables on page 32 Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box Electrical installation 39 Procedure A 1 On IT ungrounded systems and corner grounded TN systems disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type code ACS350 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one WARNING If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is inst
92. the flux optimisation function OFF 2602 FLUX BRAKING Activates deactivates the Flux Braking function OFF 2603 IR COMP VOLT Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR Varies compensation 2604 IR COMP FREQ Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V 80 2605 U F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field LINEAR weakening point 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Defines the switching frequency of the drive 4 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL Activates the switching frequency control ON 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING Enables the noise smoothing function DISABLE 2610 USER DEFINED U1 Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the USER DEFINED frequency defined by parameter 2611 F1 2611 USER DEFINED F1 Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 2612 USER DEFINED U2 Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at the USER DEFINED frequency defined by parameter 2613 F2 2613 USER DEFINED F2 Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 2614 USER DEFINED U3 Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the USER DEFINED frequency defined by parameter 2615 F3 2615 USER DEFINED F3 Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 2616 USER DEFINED U4 Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve atthe USER DEFINED frequency defi
93. trimming reference is defined by parameter 2002 if parameter 9904 value is VECTOR SPEED or VECTOR TORQ and by parameter 2008 value if parameter 9904 value is SCALAR FREQ Settings Parameter Additional information 1102 REF 1 2 selection 4230 4233 Trimming function settings 4201 4229 PID control settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits Program features 102 Example The drive runs a conveyor line It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user e activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it e tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Drive rollers pull Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Speed reference Trimmed Tension PID speed reference measurement Y Tension setpoint Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms Settings Parameter
94. value Speed Control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If AM is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque Control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106 If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 2401 2402 PID Control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 2001 2002 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop Control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 1001 1002 control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601 Timed Functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations 1001 1002 EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1401 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control 4027 Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output Signals Sele
95. value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 0 1 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 0 1 0128 PID 1SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0129 PID2SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0130 PID1FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Deviation of the process PID1 controller i e the difference between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNIT 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings Actual signals and parameters 144 Actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Deviation of the PID2 controller i e the difference between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4706 UNIT and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0134 COMM RO WORD Relay output Control Word through fieldbus decimal See parameter 1 1 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus
96. xls G Technical data 293 Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dimensioning for rated currents 4y is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maxima for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rated y current given in the rating table on page 290 If 150 output power is needed multiply current 44y by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 32 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network impedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Technical data 294 Note Larger fuses must not be used Type Fuses Size of CU conductor in cablings x EJU T 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 A SE and BRIG n Aa mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG 1 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 01 02A4 2 10 10 25 oosa 16 20 25 OMEOBAZ2 16200 25 Onc07A5 2 20 25 30 orx o0ne2 25165 1 as 6 w0 25 2 6 6 2 3 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V ooma do w 28 a ponpe oscos
97. zero along a ramp State change conditions Symbol m 1 Brake control active 0 gt 1 OR Inverter is modulating 0 2 Motor magnetised 1 AND Drive running 1 3 Brake is open AND Brake open delay passed AND Start 1 4 Start 0 5 Start 0 6 Start 1 7 Actual motor speed lt Brake close speed AND Start 0 8 Start 1 9 Brake is closed AND Brake close delay passed 1 AND Start 0 Settings Parameter Additional information 1401 1805 Mechanical brake activation through RO DO 2112 Zero speed delay Group 43 MECH BRK CONTROL Brake function settings Program features 129 Jogging The jogging function is typically used to control a cyclical movement of a machine section One push button controls the drive through the whole cycle When it is on the drive starts accelerates to a preset speed at a preset rate When it is off the drive decelerates to zero speed at a preset rate The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive They also represent how the drive shifts to normal operation jogging inactive when the drive start command is switched on Jog cmd State of the jogging input Start cmd State of the drive start command The function operates on a 2 ms time level Speed po po oy to bof 6d ihe 2 t t t gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121314 15 16 t Ph
98. 0 A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range Speed 2001 value is gt 0 Speed 2001 value is lt 0 2002 2002 Allowed speed range Allowed speed range 2001 0 gt 0 gt t 2001 2001 Allowed speed range 2002 30000 30000 rpm Minimum speed 1 1 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed maximum speed See parameter 2001 MINIMUM Eur 1500 SPEED US 1800 0 30000 rpm Maximum speed 1 1rpm 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current 1 8 lon 0 0 1 8 lon A Current 1 0 1A 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link ENABLE Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque Note If a brake chopper and resistor are connected to the drive the controller must be off selection DISABLE to allow chopper operation DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated 0 ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link ENABLE If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller TIME will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the moto
99. 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value i e is within tolerance limits 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings 0 Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 265 DCU Profile Status Word par 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 NOTICE 1 A main
100. 00 DER Filtered signal gt t Time constant 0 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 1304 MINIMUM Al2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum mA V signal for 1 analog input Al2 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Alf 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Alf 1 0 1 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal 100 for analog input Al2 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 1 0 1 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See parameter 1303 0 1 FILTER Al 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output and relay operating delays 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO The relay energises FAULT 1 when the status meets the setting NOT SEL Not used READY Ready to function Run Enable signal on no fault supply voltage within 1 acceptable range and emergency stop signal off RUN Running Start signal on Run Enable signal on no active fault 2 FAULT 1 Inverted fault Relay is de energised on a fault trip 3 FAULT Fault 4 ALARM Alarm 5 REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction 6 STARTED The drive has received start command Relay is energized even if Run 7 Enable signal is off Relay is de energized when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs SUPRV1 OVER Status according to supervision parame
101. 001 EXT1 COMMANDS down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 SAVE To save the new value press lt Po CANCEL To cancel the new value and keep the original press LOC U SHOW 1 01 1001 START STOP El DI2 ae El EXIT 00 00 Control panels 85 Application macros What this chapter contains The chapter describes the application macros For each macro there is a wiring diagram showing the default control connections digital and analog I O The chapter also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are preprogrammed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited for the purpose with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro The ACS350 has seven standard macros and three user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable applications ABB Standard Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications w
102. 0202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 0204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 0307 bit 12 0206 MMIO ID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 282 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect speed frequency limit Check parameter settings Check that following 6320 parameter setting applies 2001 lt 2002 0307 bit 15 2007 lt 2008 2001 9908 2002 9908 2007 9907 and 2008 9907 are within range 1003 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect analog input Al signal Check parameter group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 6320 scaling settings Check that following applies 0307 bit 15 1301 lt 1302 1304 lt 1305 1004 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect analog output AO Check parameter group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 6320 signal scaling settings Check that following applies 1504 lt 1505 0307 bit 15 1005 PAR PCU 2 Incorrect motor nominal power Check parameter 9909 setting Following must apply 6320 setting 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR 0307 bit 15 NOM VOLT 1 73 Px lt 3 0 Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in kW or Px 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are in HP 1007 PAR FBUSMISS Fieldbus control has not been Check fieldbus parameter settings See chapter 6320 activated Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 0307 bi
103. 04 Dimensions Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 00 e eee eee 306 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA1 0 0000 ee ee eee 307 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 00 ee 308 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA1 pesetas necon ma ana ae aE e A eee eee 309 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 2 0 0 2 ees 310 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA1 0 00 a e aA eee 311 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 0 cee ee 312 Table of contents 18 Table of contents 19 About the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes the intended audience and compatibility of this manual It also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery and installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Compatibility The manual is compatible with the ACS350 drive firmware version 2 52b or later See parameter 3301 FIRMWARE Intended audience This manual is intended for persons who plan the installation install commission use and service the drive Read the manual before working on the drive The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols This manual is written for readers worldwide Both SI and imperial units are shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States
104. 1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT LOC 3 PAR FWD Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 34 11 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX LOC 0 0 PAR FWD LOC 5000 PAR FWD Control panels 65 Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to three user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can do the following Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial
105. 103 or 1106 to COMM COMM AII1 or COMM AI1 When 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM Al1 or COMM Al1 the fieldbus reference is corrected using analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples Reference correction examples for ABB Drives profile Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM AI1 COMM MAX MIN MIN COMM MAX MIN MIN Al 50 MAX MIN Al 50 MAX MIN Corrected COMM reference REF 100 50 0 ss WEEZER Max limit Min limit 0 rpm 1500 rpm 7 A o 7 A 7500 rpm 750 rpm AS Max limi PO feria 1500 rpm 0 rpm gt TA v 0 50 100 COMM Corrected REF reference ahs COMM rererence REF 100 50 0 A O rpm 1500 rpm eee o 300 rpm 1200 rpm Mes mnt 750 rpm 750 rpm le z 1200 rpm Aa hee EE Min limit on ha ad 1500 rpm 0 rpm A gt v 0 50 100 COMM Corrected REF reference Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 250 Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COMM AI1 COMM Al 50 MAX MIN MIN COMM Al 50 MAX MIN MIN
106. 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 0 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY Defines the release delay for relay output RO 0 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through analog output and output signal processing 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 Actual signals and parameters Parameters short form list 149 Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Defines the minimum value for signal selected with parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Defines the maximum value for signal selected with parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO 0 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO 20 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO i e the time 0 1 within 63 of a step change is reached 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS Run Enable parameter lock etc 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run Enable signal NOT SEL 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock OPEN 1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG
107. 159 Def FbEq 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines the connections and the source for the start stop and direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 DI1 2 NOT SEL No start stop and direction command source DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1 0 stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI1 2 Start and stop through digital input DI1 0 stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 0 forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI1P 2P 3 Pulse start through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction through digital input DI3 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P 3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 O gt 1 Start forward Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2 O gt 1 Start reverse In order to sta
108. 19 2 19 2 kbit s 38 4 38 4 kbit s 57 6 57 6 kbit s 115 2 115 2 kbit s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit s and the data length The same 8 NONE 1 setting must be used in all on line stations 8 NONE 1 No parity bit one stop bit 8 data bits 0 8 NONE 2 No parity bit two stop bits 8 data bits 1 8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 2 8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 3 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile See section Communication profiles on ABB DRV page 258 LIM ABB DRV LIM ABB Drive limited profile 0 DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1 ABB DRV FULL ABB Drives profile 2 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Number of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation O this number increases constantly 0 65535 Number of messages 1 1 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received 0 by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 1 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5311 EFB PAR 11 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40006 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5312 EFB PAR 12 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40007 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5313 EFB PAR 13 Selects an actual value to b
109. 1ms Actual signals and parameters 186 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Description Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true O speed l Zero Speed Zero Speed gt lt gt Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The inverter modulates motor is magnetised and the drive is ready for a quick restart Def FbEq 0 0 0 60 0 s Delay time If parameter value is set to zero zero speed delay function is disabled 1 0 1s
110. 206 CONST SPEED 5 0 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1207 CONST SPEED 6 1 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 DI3 4 5 See selection DI1 2 3 13 TIMED FUNC 1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated by timed 15 function Timed function 1 active CONST SPEED 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 16 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 17 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 18 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 19 1209 TIMED MODE SEL DI1 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 1 inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive DI2 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 2 inverted digital input DI2 O active 1 inactive DI3 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 3 inverted digital input DI3 0 active 1 inactive DI4 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 4 inverted digital input DI4 O active 1 inactive DI5 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 5 inverted digital input DI5 0 active 1 inactive DI1 2 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 DI 7 active 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 Operation 1 1 No constant speed O 1 Speed d
111. 21 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation signal NOT SEL 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output 0 4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and NOT SEL proportional trimming 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC Selects the trim reference PID2REF 4233 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or SPEED FREQ torque reference 43 MECH BRK CONTROL Control of a mechanical brake 4301 BRAKE OPEN DLY Defines the brake open delay the delay between the internal 0 20 open brake command and the release of the motor speed control 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL Defines the motor starting torque current at brake release 1 4303 BRAKE CLOSE LVL Defines the brake close speed 4 0 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL Defines the speed at brake release 0 4305 BRAKE MAGN DELAY Defines motor magnetising time 0 4306 RUNTIME FREQ LVL Defines the brake close speed 0 50 ENCODER Encoder connection 5001 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution 1024 5002 ENCODER ENABLE Enables the encoder DISABLE 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in FAULT communication between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module or between the module and the drive
112. 21 AL EXT ERIM PID sii 2646664000 sa as Sow ews 221 43 MECH BRK CONTROL occ 223 SO ENCODER lt a e a o A cee tee ac ool dd eo 224 51 EXT COMM MODULE coc 224 52 PANEL COMM si oteto hae e aa o al oa 225 539 EFB PROTOGOL ie coo add dat ls a od da are ue eee 225 54 FBADATAJ N caida E A on ea dea oe 227 93 FBA DATAQUIE uti A AA a A ASS a Bae 227 84 SEQUENCE PROG vies ito pica a A a ata ads 228 98 OPTIONS 93000 epaia hadaa he da abe ea jo Oped le ged des gr 237 99 START UP DATA cu dg its eens A ea ee mee E Ode oe Saas 238 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains 0 000 eee 243 System overview 000 eee eee eee teen 243 Setting up communication through the embedded modbus 22000000000 0s 245 Drive control parameters iona Sed cee wou ew ee eee Se eB a WG a a 246 The fieldbus Control interface ccoo eek earn e Wide mie hanged alate bee Ma x i n 248 The Control Word and the Status Word 0 eee eens 248 RRETERENCES srren ot E E ened AA ia Oden aaa we ea 248 Actual VAS ii e doe tae Seats ee eh AA A sas wat ele en ee ee 248 Field DUS references io nar wrest e ares tac al wane ua ae Gena aS 249 Table of contents 16 Reference selection and correction o o ooooooococooro 249 Fieldbus reference scaling n nunnana anana 253 Reference handling 0 00 c cece ee eee eens 254 Actual value SCaling ei coee oe ide Bees Be eae ieee Fee SE Oe ee ee A 254
113. 3 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 3 Eur 15 US 18 1205 CONST SPEED 4 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 4 Eur 20 US 24 1206 CONST SPEED 5 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 5 Eur 25 US 30 1207 CONST SPEED 6 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 6 Eur 40 US 48 1208 CONST SPEED 7 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 7 Eur 50 US 60 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Selects timed function activated speed into use when parameter CS1 2 3 4 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUN182 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Analog input signal processing 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum mA 0 01 V signal for analog input Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum 100 mA V signal for analog input Al 1303 FILTER Al1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 i e the time 0 1 within 63 of a step change is reached 1304 MINIMUM Al2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum mA 0 01 V signal for analog input Al2 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum 100 mA V signal for analog input Al2 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 0 1 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output and relay operating delays 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO FAULT 1
114. 3408 setting 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par 3408 SIGNAL2 DIRECT FORM PARAM See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 209 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel in display mode 105 See par 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 172 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1 1 If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 See par 3402 SIGNAL1
115. 4 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 1 1 rpm 0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1 Hz 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT Intemediate circuit voltage in VDC at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1V 0407 CURRENT AT FLT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1A 0408 TORQUE AT FLT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1 0409 STATUS AT FLT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the 2nd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing for the codes 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the 3rd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing for the codes 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault occurred binary Actual signals and parameters 148 Parameters short form list Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 10 START STOP DIR The sources for external start stop and direction control 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines the connections and the source for the start stop and DI1 2 direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
116. 4 510 7 082 374 D510 320 5 301 085 5 654 624 6 147 887 6 265 724 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 934 169 6 984 958 7 036 223 7 084 604 D511 137 Other patents pending 5 463 302 5 799 805 6 175 256 6 305 464 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 956 352 6 985 371 7 045 987 7 098 623 D511 150 5 521 483 5 940 286 6 184 740 6 313 599 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 958 923 6 992 908 7 057 908 7 102 325 D512 026 5 532 568 5 942 874 6 195 274 6 316 896 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 967 453 6 999 329 7 059 390 D503 931 D512 696 5 589 754 5 952 613 6 229 356 6 335 607 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 972 976 7 023 160 7 067 997 D510 319 D521 466 Technical data 302 Brake resistors ACS350 drives have an internal brake chopper as standard equipment The brake resistor is selected using the table and equations presented in this section Brake resistor selection 1 Determine the required maximum braking power Prmax for the application Prmax must be smaller than Pgrmax given in the table on page 303 for the used drive type 2 Calculate resistance R with Equation 1 3 Calculate energy Erpulse With Equation 2 4 Select the resistor so that the following conditions are met e The rated power of the resistor must be greater than or equal to Prmax e Resistance R must be between Rmin and Rmax given in the table for the used drive type e The resistor must be able to dissipate energy Erpulse during the braking cycle T Equations for s
117. 5 03x 04A1 4 130 300 1 5 2 03x 05A6 4 100 200 2 2 3 03x 07A3 4 70 150 3 0 3 03x 08A8 4 70 110 4 0 5 03x 12A5 4 40 80 5 5 7 5 03x 15A6 4 40 60 7 5 10 03x 23A1 4 30 40 11 15 03x 31A0 4 16 29 15 20 03x 38A0 4 13 23 18 5 25 03x 44A0 4 13 19 22 0 30 00353783 xls G Rmin minimum allowed brake resistor Rmax Maximum allowed brake resistor PBRmax Maximum braking capacity of the drive must exceed the desired braking power WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Technical data 304 Resistor installation and wiring A All resistors must be installed in a place where they will cool WARNING The materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable The surface temperature of the resistor is high Air flowing from the resistor is of hundreds of degrees Celsius Protect the resistor against contact Use a shielded cable with the conductor size specified in section Power cables terminal sizes maximum cable diameters and tightening torques on page 295 For short circuit protection of the brake resistor connection see Brake resistor connection on page 297 Alternatively a two conductor shielded cable with the same cross sectional area can be used The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 5 m 16 ft For the connections see the power co
118. 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables the encoder zero Z pulse Zero pulse is used for DISABLE position reset 5011 POSITION RESET Enables the position reset DISABLE 51 EXT COMM MODULE Fieldbus adapter module parameters 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 5102 FB PAR 2 These parameters are adapter module specific 5126 FB PAR 26 Actual signals and parameters Parameters short form list 157 Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings 52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive 1 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link 39242 5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit s 8 NONE 1 5204 OK MESSAGES Number of valid messages received by the drive 0 5205 PARITY ERRORS Number of characters with a parity error received from the 0 Modbus link 5206 FRAME ERRORS Number of characters with a framing error received by the 0 Modbus link 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Number of characters which overflow the buffer i e number of 0 characters which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check 0 error rec
119. 7 About control panels si oniani A A ea wie ae a ek te PME be hes 57 A 57 Basic Control Panel beds y ad ta a de add a i 58 FSatUreS e a a mache lA cien 58 OVEIVIEW A A A te AAA A bo 58 Operation senta meto o o o O i A A O a e e AA tin 59 OUTPULIMOd C23 es cue nec hee eet Sid a Seed Dh ee Sw edad Ba tied eae tas 61 Reference MOUS gece x ete its dence od atest A A eae es shart dase aka omen ite 62 Parameter MOB cui ed ae Pk eo E Pea Bee ah We ee A ee ee 63 COPY MOJO rasa Beet ts E A A A eR oc cote e aM ee NN etic 65 Basic Control Panel alarm codes naana eea eee es 66 Assistant Control Panel 67 Features Lac a Cees wilt ellen Minted Suwa ee ae oped een races Bale 67 ONES Weis atar eaten Pruitt A ea aris cuneate EA hn ae tad rca ia bs 67 OPERAtION ui is mae HAS aoe Ree Meee ett nen vedas Acad ae ethane 68 Quiput Mode vns isso eR ee abe tate Se a ee Bel aa OA Meld ade 72 Parameters MOS A Sia Rhee A CHU ee PA ote 74 Assistants mode A we GS a ee A 76 Changed Parameters mode 0 000 cece eect eee ete 77 Fault kogger Mode untada Med ae head pha baad ds Bata beats 78 Time a nd Date Mode srei haved a eee to AE A Reha oath tees oe Goat a BAe 79 Parameter Backup mode moriens aan i a oant a a aa AA eee 81 VO SENOS MOUS e a a A od e te ag 84 Application macros What this chapter contains asaan 000 eee 85 Overview OR Macros std a a EE hee e A Gis aE E E A AE E A aE he GROE A A hi EN 85 Summary of I O con
120. 9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast to stop Bit O value must be 1 STOP 0 No operation 10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 defined by parameters 2205 2207 0 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 defined by parameters 2202 2204 11 RAMP_OUT_0O 1 Force ramp output to zero 0 No operation 12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 0 No operation 13 RAMP_IN_O 1 Force ramp input to zero 0 No operation 14 REQ_LOCALLOC 1 Enable local lock Entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel 0 No operation 15 TORQLIM2 1 Use minimum maximum torque limit 2 defined by parameters 2016 and 2018 0 Use minimum maximum torque limit 1 defined by parameters 2015 and 2017 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 263 DCU PROFILE Control Word par 0302 Bit Name Value Information 16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control Word requested Example If the drive is in remote control and the start stop direction command source is DI for external control location 1 EXT1 by setting bit 16 to value 1 the start stop direction is controlled by the fieldbus command word 0 No fieldbus local mode 17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control Word for reference requested See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL 0 No fieldbus local mode 18 START_DISABLE1 1 No Start Enable 0 Enable star
121. A8 4 J404 ACS350 product series 1 phase 3 phase 01 1 phase input 03 3 phase input Configuration E EMC filter connected 50 Hz frequency U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output current rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part e g 08A8 means 8 8 A For more information see section Ratings on page 290 Input voltage range 2 200 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC Options J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel J400 ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel Area 1 Language support for EN EN AM DE IT ES PT NL FR DA FI SV J416 ACS CP L Assistant Control Panel Area 2 Language support for EN DE RU PL TR CS J402 MPOT 01 Potentiometer K451 FDNA 01 DeviceNet K454 FPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP K457 FCAN 01 CANopen K458 FMBA 01 Modbus RTU Hardware description 24 Hardware description 25 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter describes the mechanical installation procedure of the drive Unpacking the drive The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R1 shown in the figure plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O cables in frame size R3 and R4 1 O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 fieldbus option ground plate clamps and screws panel cover 3 mounting template integrated into the package 4 user s manual 5 poss
122. ACS350 User s Manual ACS350 Drives 0 37 22 kW 0 5 30 HP DE y A ea ey F ACS350 drive manuals OPTION MANUALS delivered with optional equipment FCAN 01 CANopen Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68615500 EN FDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68573360 EN FMBA 01 Modbus Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68586704 EN FPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68573271 EN FRSA 00 RS 485 Adapter Board User s Manual 3AFE68640300 EN MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 EN MPOT 01 Potentiometer Module Instructions for Installation and Use 3AFE68591082 EN DA DE ES Fl FR IT NL PT RU SV MTAC 01 Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AFE68591091 EN MUL1 R1 Installation Instructions for ACS150 and ACS350 3AFE68642868 EN DA DE ES Fl FR IT NL PT RU SV MUL1 R3 Installation Instructions for ACS150 and ACS350 3AFE68643147 EN DA DE ES Fl FR IT NL PT RU SV MAINTENANCE MANUALS Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 EN ACS350 Drives 0 37 22 kW 0 5 30 HP User s Manual 3AFE68462401 Rev D EN EFFECTIVE 30 09 2007 2007 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to
123. ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 0 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done Par 4016 Source Source min Source max 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 2 Analog input 2 1301 MINIMUM Al2 1302 MAXIMUM Al2 3 Current 0 2 nominal current 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power The ACT minimum and maximum correspond the 1301 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows A Normal B Inversion ACT1 minimum gt ACT1 maximum ACT1 ACTI 4018 4019 4018 Al 1301 1302 1000 1000 Value in percent 1 1 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an analog input is 100 selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 4076 ACT1 INPUT The minimum 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller See parameter 4078 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 Value in percent 1 1 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 1000 1000 See parameter 4018 1 1 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 1000 1000 See parameter 4019 1 1 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 219
124. ATA and the results of the motor identification run into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time For example three user macros can be used when switching between three different motors is required Application macros 86 Summary of I O connections of application macros The following table gives the summary of the default I O connections of all application macros Macro Input output ABB Motor Tor que Standard 3 wire Alternate Potentioin Hand Auto PID Control Control AM Freq ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref Speed ref 0 10 V Hand Hand Proc Speed ref PID Al2 Speed ref Process value Torque ref 0 20 mA Auto Torque AO Output freq Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed DI1 Stop Start Start pulse Start fwd Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Hand Hand Speed DI2 Fwd Rev Stop pulse Start rev Fwd Rev Fwd Rev Hand PID Fwd Rev Hand DI3 Const speed Fwd Rev Const speed Speed ref up Hand Auto Const Speed Torque input 1 input 1 speed 1 DI4 Const speed Const speed Const speed Speed ref Fwd Rev Run enable Const input 2 input 1 input 2 down Auto speed 1 DI5 Ramp pair Const speed Ramp pair Const Stop Start Stop Start Ramp pair selection input 2 selection speed 1 Auto PID selection RO Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 F
125. Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT Al as reference source Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Analog input processing 3001 3021 3022 3107 Al loss supervision Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Al in motor temperature measurement Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Alas PID process control reference or actual value source 42 EXT TRIM PID 8420 8425 8426 Al as sequence programming reference or trigger signal 8430 8435 8436 8490 8495 8496 Program features 103 Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0120 0121 Analog input values 1401 Al1 A2 signal loss Alarm AI LOSS Al2 LOSS Al1 Al2 signal below Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 Fault Alt LOSS Al2 LOSS AI1 Al2 signal below limit Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 1302 lt 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 to 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2 ms Analog output can be controlled with sequence programming It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link Settings Parameter Additional information Group
126. B CMD WORD 1 i e the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word Supported only by DCU profile i e when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40032 Control Word MSW R W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 i e the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control Word Supported only by DCU profile i e when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40033 Status Word LSW 0303 FB STS WORD 1 i e the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile i e when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40034 ACS350 STATUS WORD MSW 0304 FB STS WORD 2 i e the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status Word Supported only by DCU profile i e when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all changed values Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Function codes 257 Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are Code Function name Additional information Hex dec 03 03 Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers 4X references in a slave device 06 06 Preset single 4X Presets a value into a single register 4X reference When register broadcast the function p
127. Bit 8 Reserved Actual signals and parameters 146 Actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 9 DRIVE ID Bit 10 CONFIG FILE Bit 11 SERIAL 1 ERR Bit 12 EFB CON FILE Configuration file reading error Bit 13 FORCE TRIP Bit 14 MOTOR PHASE Bit 15 OUTP WIRING FbEq 0307 FAULT WORD 3 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing Bit 0 2 Reserved Bit 3 INCOMPATIBLE SW Bit 4 10 Reserved Bit 11 MMIO ID ERROR Bit 12 DSP STACK ERROR Bit 13 DSP T1 T3 OVERLOAD Bit 14 SERF CORRUPT SERF MACRO Bit 15 PAR PCU 1 2 PAR HZRPM PAR AI SCALE PAR AO SCALE PAR FBUS MISS PAR CUSTOM U F 0308 ALARM WORD 1 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE Bit 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Bit 3 DIRLOCK Bit 4 IO COMM Bit 5 Al1 LOSS Bit 6 Al2 LOSS Bit 7 PANEL LOSS Bit 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Bit 9 MOTOR TEMP Bit 10 UNDERLOAD Bit 11 MOTOR STALL Bit 12 AUTORESET Bit 13 15 Reserved 0309 ALARM WORD 2 A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see c
128. C ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do e Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do e Check the RS 232 485 interface connection Fault tracing 284 Fault tracing 285 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Safety before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety WARNING Read the instructions in chapter Safety on the first pages of this manual instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Reforming of capacitors Every two years when stored See Capacitors on page 286 Cooling fan replacement Every three years See Fan on page 285 frame sizes R1 R4 Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Battery on page 287 the Assistant Control Panel Fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours
129. C REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display 9 STOP Stops the drive in local control 10 ISTART Starts the drive in local control Control panels 68 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive Loc J LOC UMAIN MENU 1 4 O 4 No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel REM Drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 2 State u Forward shaft direction J Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation Name of the current mode mode e Name of the list or menu shown e Name of the operation state e g PAR EDIT 4 Reference value e Reference value in the Output mode or number of the e Number of the highlighted item e g mode selected item parameter group or fault Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context
130. CE Do you want to use the start up assistant NO EXIT 00 00 OK REM CHOICE Show start up assistant _on next_boot NO EXIT 100 00 OK REM UPAR EDIT 9901 LANGUAGE ISH 0 EXIT 00 00 SAVE REM UPAR EDIT 9905 SSON VOLT V EXIT 00 00 SAVE Start up control with I O and ID Run 52 After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the REM CHOICE Do you want to next one continue with Inue 3 Press SI when aka is highlighted to continue with the aa gt suggested task at 00 00 OK e Press key vto highlight and then press to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT e Press Ey to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER MACRO AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user macro as instructed in section User macros on page 94 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run 53 How to control the drive through the I O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when e the moto
131. Current state time counter 0170 Analog output PID reference control values 0171 Executed sequence counter Program features The state diagram below presents the state shift in sequence programming Sequence programming ENABLE 0167 bitO 1 STATE 1 par 8420 8424 0168 1 State 1 Go to state N par 8426 8427 Go to state 2 par 8425 STATE 2 State N par 8430 8434 0168 2 State 2 Go to state N par 8436 8437 Go to state 3 par 8435 State N STATE 3 par 8440 8444 0168 3 State 3 Go to state N par 8446 8447 Go to state 4 par 8445 STATE 4 State N par 8450 8454 0168 4 State 4 Go to state N par 8456 8457 Go to state 5 par 8455 STATE 5 par 8460 8464 State N 0168 5 State 5 Go to state N par 8466 8467 Go to state 6 par 8465 State N STATE 6 par 8470 8474 0168 6 State 6 Go to state N par 8476 8477 Go to state 7 par 8475 STATE 7 State N par 8480 8484 0168 7 State 7 Go to state N par 8486 8487 Go to state 8 par 8485 State N STATE 8 par 8490 8494 0168 8 State 8 Go to state N par 8496 8497 State N NN State change NN State PX X
132. D1 control parameter set 2 See section P D control on page 120 221 Def FbEq 4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4102 INTEGRATION TIME See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 4103 DERIVATION TIME See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME 4104 PID DERIV FILTER See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 4105 ERROR VALUE INV See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS 4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 4108 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4109 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4110 SETPOINT SEL See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 4112 SETPOINT MIN See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN 4113 SETPOINT MAX See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4117 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP SELECTION See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 4125 WAKE UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV 4126 WAKE UP DELAY See pa
133. DI1 INV Timer reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No reset signal 0 DI1 Timer reset through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 START Timer reset at start Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER 6 START START INV Time reset at start inverted i e timer is reset when start signal is 7 deactivated Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START RESET External reset e g reset through fieldbus 8 1904 COUNTER ENABLE Selects the source for the counter enable signal DISABLED DI1 INV Counter enable signal through inverted digital input DI1 0 active 1 1 inactive DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 DISABLED No counter enable 0 DI Counter enable signal through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 Actual signals and parameters 178 Parameters complete descriptions Ind
134. EED 1 is activated through 2 digital input DI2 1 active 0 inactive DI3 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 3 digital input DI3 1 active 0 inactive DI4 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 4 digital input DI4 1 active O inactive DI5 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through 5 digital input DI5 1 active O inactive Actual signals and parameters 165 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI1 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 DI active 7 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 Operation 0 O No constant speed 1 O Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 DI2 3 See selection DI1 2 8 DI3 4 See selection DI1 2 9 DI4 5 See selection DI1 2 10 DI1 2 3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 DI2 and DI3 1 DI 12 active 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 DI3 Operation 0 0 O INo constant speed 1 0 O Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 1 O Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 O Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1
135. FF IDMAGN 0 The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2107 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed Actual signals and parameters 241 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq ON ID Run Guarantees the best possible control accuracy The ID Run takes 1 about one minute An ID Run is especially effective when vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and Operation point is near zero speed and or Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting
136. Fieldbus devices gt X3 Fieldbus Adapter Data flow Control Word CW lt 4t __ References Status Word SW Actual values gt Process l O cyclic lt a Parameter R W Requests Responses Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources e g digital and analog inputs The drive can communicate to a control system via fieldbus adapter using one of the following serial communication protocols PROFIBUS DP FPBA 01 adapter CANopen FCAN 01 adapter DeviceNet FDNA 01 adapter Modbus RTU FMBA 01 adapter See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 268 The drive detects automatically which fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3 exception FMBA 01 DCU profile is always used in communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter see section The fieldbus control interface on page 270 The communication profile on the fieldbus network depends on the type of the connected adapter The default profile settings are protocol dependent e g vendor specific profile ABB Drives for PROFIBUS and industry standard drive profile AC DC Drive for DeviceNet
137. IGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 4010 4110 COMM PID control reference REF2 40003 for REF2 4210 SET COMM AI1 POINT SEL COMM AI1 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 248 The fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words with ABB Drives profile and 32 bit input and output words with DCU profile The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference e g reverse direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as speed frequency torque or process reference Actual Values Actual Values ACT are 16 bit words containing selected values of the drive Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 249 Fieldbus references Reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1
138. Input power connection Voltage U Short circuit capacity Frequency Imbalance Fundamental power factor cos phi Motor connection 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 1 phase for 200 VAC drives 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 3 phase for 200 VAC drives 380 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 3 phase for 400 VAC drives 110 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage 0 98 at nominal load Voltage U2 Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C Frequency Frequency resolution Current Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Speed control Torque control Maximum recommended motor cable length 0 to U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and UL 508C Vector control 0 max 150 Hz recommended Scalar control 0 500 Hz 0 01 Hz See section Ratings on page 290 15 Pn 10 500 Hz 4 8 12 or 16 kHz in scalar control mode See section Speed control performance figures on page 114 See section Torque control performance figures on page 114 RO 30 m 100 ft R1 R4
139. LERATOR ENABLED 0 Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET O gt 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM 0 Continue normal operation 8 9 Not in use 10 Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ABB DRV 0 Control Word 0 or Reference 0 Retain last Control Word and Reference FULL Control Word 0 and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM 0 Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM 12 15 Reserved Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 260 The following table and the state diagram later in this section describe the Status Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile EFB Status Word par 5320 Bit Name Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT Se
140. M 1 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive via a normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input 1 motor overtemperature 3502 INPUT SELECTION Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement signal Al Al Analog input Al1 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Al2 Analog input Al2 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement DI1 Digital input DI1 Used when par 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI2 Digital input DI2 Used when par 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI3 Digital input DI3 Used when par 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI4 Digital input DI4 Used when par 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 DI5 Digital input DI5 Used when par 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is exceeded When par 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 alarm X X Alarm limit 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the limit is exceeded When par 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERMI 0 1 1 fault Fau
141. MP Alarm Fault by motor overtemperature protection function See parameter 27 3005 MOT THERM PROT STALL Alarm Fault by stall protection function See parameter 3070 STALL 28 FUNCTION UNDERLOAD Alarm Fault by underload protection function See parameter 3013 29 UNDERLOAD FUNC PID SLEEP PID sleep function See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 30 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque 33 USER MACRO 2 User Macro 2 is active 34 COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 35 1 energize output 0134 value Binary DO RO 0 000000 0 0 1 000001 0 1 2 000010 1 0 3 000011 1 1 COMM 1 Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 36 1 energize output 0134 value Binary DO RO 0 000000 1 1 1 000001 1 0 2 000010 0 1 3 000011 0 0 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active See parameter group 36 T MED FUNCTIONS 37 TIMED FUNC 2 Timed function 2 is active See parameter group 36 T MED FUNCTIONS 38 TIMED FUNC 3 Timed function 3 is active See parameter group 36 T MED FUNCTIONS 39 TIMED FUNC 4 Timed function 4 is active See parameter group 36 T MED FUNCTIONS 40 M TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered See parameter group 29 41 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE 42 TRIG Actual signals and parameters 170 Parameters complete descriptions
142. ND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA D7 FTI 5 Al2 Process actual value 4 20 mA E 6 GND Analog input circuit common max 500 ohm OF ai 7 JAO Motor speed value 0 20 mA E T7 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI Stop 0 Start 1 Hand 13 DI2 Hand 0 PID 1 control selection 14 DI3 Constant speed 1 parameter 1202 15 DI4 Run enable AY 16 DI5 Stop 0 Start 1 PID X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 l19 RONO MS 20 DOSRC A Digital output max 100 mA Q 21 DOOUT lt Jey No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 Hand 0 10 V gt speed reference 3 The signal source must be powered externally PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint See the manufacturer s instructions An 2 example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 41 Tightening torque 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in 360 degree grounding under a clamp Application macros Torque Control macro 93 This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CTRL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use ot
143. NTER LIMIT 6 STRT STP CMD Counter reset at start stop command Source for the start stop is selected by 7 parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND S S CMD INV Counter reset at start stop command inverted i e counter is reset when 8 start stop command is deactivated Start signal source is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START RESET Reset enabled 9 1908 COUNTER RES VAL Defines the value for the counter after reset 0 0 65535 Counter value 1 1 1909 COUNT DIVIDER Defines the divider for the pulse counter 0 0 12 Pulse counter divider N Every 2N bit is counted 1 1 1910 COUNT DIRECTION Defines the source for the counter direction selection UP DI1 INV Counter direction selection through inverted digital input DI1 1 counts up 1 0 counts down DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 Actual signals and parameters 179 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 UP Counts up DI Counter direction selection through digital input DI1 O counts up 1 1 counts down DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DOWN Counts down 6 1911 CNTRS S Selects the source for the drive start stop command when parameter 1001 NOT SEL COMMAND EXT1 COMMANDS value
144. NV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3005 MOT THERM PROT Selects how the drive reacts when the motor overtemperature is detected FAULT NOT SEL Protection is inactive 0 FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the temperature exceeds 1 110 C and the motor coasts to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor temperature 2 exceeds 90 C 3006 MOT THERM TIME Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal model i e the time 500 within the motor temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thumb Motor thermal time 35 t6 t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load 4 Temp rise 4 100 ir 63 T Par 3006 256 9999 s Time constant 1 1s Actual signals and parameters 198 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Description Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 B
145. ONTROL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules PID Control Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals TORQUE CTRL Language Select Motor Set up Application Option Modules Speed Control EXT2 Start Stop Control Timed Functions Protections Output Signals Program features 96 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests the allowed range Setting the limits Name Description Set parameters Language Select Selecting the language 9901 Motor Set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are notin 9970 Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option Modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed Control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed frequency limits Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 1103 1301 1303 3001 1104 1105 2001 2002 2007 2008 2202 2203 Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual
146. P DELAY 4125 WAKE UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV 4126 WAKE UP DELAY See parameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Actual signals and parameters 156 Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 42 EXT TRIM PID External Trim PID PID2 control 4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4202 INTEGRATION TIME See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 4203 DERIVATION TIME See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME 4204 PID DERIV FILTER See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 4205 ERROR VALUE INV See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS 4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 4208 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4209 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4210 SET POINT SEL See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 4212 SETPOINT MIN See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN 4213 SETPOINT MAX See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX 4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 4216 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4217 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 42
147. P I BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup with keys A and CY 7 and press SS During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 7 if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the A OK completion Press lt to return to the Par Backup To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par Backup with keys lt 45 and vy and press SS The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press aw if you want to stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the Al OK completion Press to return to the Par Backup LOC UPAR BACKUP Copying parameters 50 ABORT 00 00 LOC U MESSAGE Parameter_upload successful OK 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set ae 50 p ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 100 00 Control panels How to view information about the backup 83 Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if y
148. PROG OUT Sequence programming output See parameter group 84 SEQUENCE 33 PROG 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Selects a constant value as process PID controller reference when 40 parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4012 SETPOINT MIN Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference signal source See 0 parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the PID reference source value of parameter 4070 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond the 1301 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows A Ref A Ref MAX gt MIN 4012 MIN gt MAX 4013 _2______ MIN MAX l l 4013 4012 q pt et ea MIN _Alt MAX Alt 1301 1302 1301 1302 4013 SETPOINT MAX Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference signal source 100 See parameters 4070 SET POINT SEL and 4072 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value feedback signal for the process PID ACT1 controller The sources for the variables ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4076 ACT1 INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT ACT1 ACT1 1 ACT1 ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT 2 2 ACT1 ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3 ACT1 ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4 ACT1 ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5 MIN ACT1 2 Selects the smal
149. REAK POINT FREQ If value is set to 100 the maximum allowed load is equal to parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value Load curve should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from nominal temperature ln 150 output current In nominal motor current 100 Loira Par 3007 E 50 Par 3008 Par 3009 Def FbEq 100 50 150 Allowed continuous motor load in percent of the nominal motor current 1 1 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 70 25 150 Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of the nominal motor current 1 1 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 3008 have default values ly Output current In Nominal motor current fo Output frequency 5 A lolly fark Break point frequency A Trip time 180 s SAA 600 s folferk 0 r r r j PD 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 35 1 250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100 load 1 1 Hz Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 199 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3010 STALL FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts to a motor s
150. RIG ENTER 8435 ENTER 8445 ENTER 8455 ENTER TOST2 SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT SETPNT 8426 ST1 TRIG NOT SEL 8436 CHANGE 8446 CHANGE 8456 CHANGE f TOSTN DLY DLY DLY State change trigger 8427 ST1 STATE 1 8437 STATE 8 8447 STATE 8 8457 STATE 8 STATE N ST5 ST6 ST7 ST8 Additional Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting information 8460 ST5 REF 40 8470 65 8480 0 8490 0 State reference SEL 8461 ST5 START FRW 8471 START 8481 DRIVE 8491 DRIVE Start stop and direction COMMANDS FRW STOP STOP commands 8462 ST5 Os 8472 1 5s 8482 0 1 ramp 8492 0 1 ramp Acceleration RAMP pair 1 pair 1 deceleration ramp time 8463 ST5 OUT AO 0 8473 AO 0 8483 DO 1 8493 RO 1 Relay digital and CONTROL analog output control 8464 ST5 0 2s 8474 0s 8484 Os 8494 Os State change delay CHANGE DLY 8465 ST5 TRIG ENTER 8475 NOT SEL 8485 NOT SEL 8495 LOGIC VAL TO ST6 SETPNT 8466 ST5 TRIG SUPRV1 8476 CHANGE 8486 LOGIC VAL 8496 NOT SEL TOSTN OVER DLY State change trigger 8467 ST5 STATE 7 8477 STATE 2 8487 STATE 1 8497 STATE 1 STATE N Program features 140 Program features 141 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter Terms and abbreviations Term Definition Actual signal Signal measured or
151. RVOLTAGE Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link DISABLE undervoltage fault Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by par 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive 0 ENABLE Active 1 3107 AR AI lt MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI lt MIN analog input DISABLE signal under the allowed minimum level Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by par 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive 0 ENABLE Active 1 WARNING The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analog input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the EXTERNAL FAULT 1 2 DISABLE Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by par 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive 0 ENABLE Active 1 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 203 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision Supervision status can be monitored with relay or transistor output See parameter groups 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised signal Supervision limits are defined by 103 parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Example 1 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO lt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay energises when v
152. See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3614 START TIME 4 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3615 STOP TIME 4 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 3616 START DAY 4 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3617 STOP DAY 4 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL NOT SEL No booster activation signal 0 DI1 Digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 0 active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 Actual signals and parameters 213 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3623 BOOSTER TIME Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated after the booster 00 00 00 activation signal is switched off 00 00 00 23 59 58 hours minutes seconds Example If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1 and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01 30 00 the booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated Booster active F DI lt g
153. Selects the source for the external PID function activation signal Parameter NOT SEL 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected 0 DI1 Digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start Start drive running active 7 ON Activation at drive power up Power up drive powered active 8 TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function Timed function 1 active PID control active 9 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 10 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 11 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 12 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output When PID controller 0 is activated controller output starts from the offset value When PID controller is deactivated controller output is reset to the offset value Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional NOT SEL trimming With trimming it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See se
154. T 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 78 for more information Fault tracing 274 Alarm messages generated by the drive CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2001 OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check motor load 2310 controller is active Check acceleration time 2202 and 2205 0308 bit O Check motor and motor cable including phasing programmable fault eck ambient conditions Load capacity decreases i ble faul Check ambi diti Load ity d if function 1610 installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 297 2002 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage controller Check deceleration time 2203 and 2206 3210 is active Check input power line for static or transient overvoltage 0308 bit 1 programmable fault function 1610 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage controller Check input power supply 3220 is active 0308 bit 2 programmable fault function 1610 2004 DIRLOCK Change of direction is not Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION settings 0308 bit 3 allowed 2005 10 COMM Fieldbus communication Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter 7510 break Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Fieldbus control with 0308 bit 4 embedded fi
155. TA 1A Max 100 m s 330 ft s2 11 ms Free fall Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 cm 30 in Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C e hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers extruded aluminium AlSi Corrugated cardboard The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Technical data 299 Applicable standards The drive complies with the following standards IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Electrical thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable frequency a c power drives IEC EN 60204 1 1997 Safety
156. TART Sequence programming activation at drive start 6 TIMED FUNC 1 Sequence programming is activated by time function 1 See parameter group 7 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 8 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 9 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 10 RUNNING Sequence programming is always active 11 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 229 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE Selects the source for the sequence programming pause signal When NOT SEL sequence programming pause is activated all timers and outputs RO TO AO are freezed Sequence programming state transition is possible only by parameter 8405 SEQ ST FORCE DI1 INV Pause signal through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No pause signal 0 DI Pause signal through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 PAUSED Sequence programming pause enabled 6 8404 SEQ PROG RESET Selects the source for the sequence programming reset signal Sequence NOT SEL programming state 0168 SEQ PROG STATE is set
157. TO CONTROL CTRL 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS PDI1 2 DI1P 2P 3 DI1F 2R DI1 2 DI1 2 DI1 DI1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS NOT SEL NOT SEL INOT SEL NOT SEL DI5 4 DI5 DI1 2 1003 DIRECTION REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 DI3 DI2 DI3 1103 REF1 SELECT Al Al1 Al1 DI3U 4D N JAl1 Al1 Al1 C 1106 REF2 SELECT Al2 Al2 Al2 Al2 Al2 PID1OUT Al2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL DI3 4 DI4 5 DI3 4 DI5 NOT SEL DI3 DI4 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 102 1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL INOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL DI4 NOT SEL 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL DI5 NOT SEL DI5 NOT SEL NOTSEL NOT SEL DI5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 1103 102 102 102 102 102 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM _ 103 102 102 102 102 102 102 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB 3 WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR HAND PID CTRL TORQUE STANDARD POT AUTO CTRL 9904 MOTOR CTRL SCALAR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR MODE FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED TORQ Actual signals and parameters Actual signals Actual signals 143 No Name Value Description FbEq 01 OPERATING DATA Basic signals for monitoring the drive read only 0101 SPEED amp DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm A negative value indicates reverse 1 1 rpm direction 0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Calculated drive output frequency in Hz Sh
158. TORQUE 1 Value defined by parameter 2075 MIN TORQUE 1 0 DI1 Digital input DI1 O parameter 2075 MIN TORQUE 1 value 1 parameter 1 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 value DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1 2 selection i e control 7 word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Minimum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2075 MIN TORQUE 1 and minimum torque limit 2 is defined by parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 value of parameter 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 0 1 value of parameter 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Selects the maximum torque limit for the drive MAX TORQUE 1 MAX TORQUE 1 Value of parameter 2077 MAX TORQUE 1 DI1 Digital input DI1 O parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 value 1 parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value Actual signals and parameters 182 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection D
159. The actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature When the Assistant Control Panel is in use the Notice Handler Assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 1401 regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 286 Fan replacement R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling 1 2 Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with e g a screwdriver and lift the hinged oOo N OO A as amp cu As sa AN ES Eo Stop the drive and disconnect it from the AC power source Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option fan holder slightly upward from its front edge Free the fan cable from the clip Disconnect the fan cable Remove the fan holder from the hinges Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order Restore power Oma 2 EE SS Pe asi I i Capacitors Reforming The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for two years See the table o
160. V 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 See section Block Al1 diagram Reference source for EXT1 on page 99 KEYPAD Control panel 0 Al Analog input Al1 Al2 Analog input Al2 2 Actual signals and parameters 162 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq Al1 JOYST Analog input Al1 as joystick The minimum input signal runs the motor at the 3 maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 MAX Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST Speed ref A par 1301 20 par 1302 100 REF1 11057 C gt 11044 1104 0 is 11041 1104 1105 s Hysteresis 4 Vy of full scale 2V 4mA 6 10 V 20 mA WARNING If parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 is set to O V and analog input signal is lost i e O V the rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog input signal is lost Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 to 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to FAULT Al2 JOYST See selection Al1 JOYST DI3U 4D R Digital input 3 Reference
161. WITCH FREQ CTRL Description Activates the switching frequency control When active the selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited when the drive internal temperature increases See the figure below This function allows the highest possible switching frequency at a specific operation point Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise but higher internal losses Drive temperature 4 kHz gt 80 100 C 100 120 C Temperature depends on the drive output frequency Def FbEq ON OFF Inactive ON Active 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation control 100 means full slip compensation 0 means no slip compensation Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation Can be used only with scalar control i e when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Example 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite of the full slip compensation SLIP COMP RATIO 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz The static speed error is 35 Hz 34 Hz 1 Hz To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased 0 200 Slip gain 1 1 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING Enables the noise smoothing function Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a si
162. Word 5 Actual value 1 6 Actual value 2 101 9999 Parameter index 5402 FBADATAIN 2 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 5410 FBA DATA IN 10 See 5401 FBA DATA IN 1 55 FBA DATA OUT Data from fieldbus controller to drive via a fieldbus adapter See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Note In adapter module the parameter group number is 2 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 Selects data to be transferred from the fieldbus controller to the drive 0 Not in use 1 6 Control and status data words 5501 setting Data word 1 Control Word 2 REF1 3 REF2 4 Status Word 5 Actual value 1 6 Actual value 2 101 9999 Drive parameter 5502 FBA DATA OUT 2 See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 5510 FBA DATA OUT 10 See 5501 FBA DATA OUT 1 Actual signals and parameters 228 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 84 SEQUENCE PROG Sequence programming See section Sequence programming on page 133 8401 SEQPROG ENABLE Enables sequence programming DISABLED If sequence programming enable signal is lost the sequence programming is stopped sequence programming state 0168 SEQ PROG STATE is set to 1 and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero DISABLED Disabled 0 EXT2 Enabled in external control location 2 EXT2 1 EXT1 Enabled in external control location 1 EXT1 2 EXT1 am
163. XXXXXXXXX Control panels 71 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 e To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local LOC P NES SAGE h control LOC shown on the status line press i Test ung Eo TS jez Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press E The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 73 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings The arrow or 5 on the status line stops rotating The arrow U or 5 on the status line starts rotating lt is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint e To stop the drive in local control press CG e To start the drive
164. a and adjust parameters The ACS350 works with either of two different control panel types e Basic Control Panel This panel described below provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values e Assistant Control Panel This panel described in section Assistant Control Panel on page 67 includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following versions e Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev K e Assistant Control Panel Area 1 ACS CP A Rev Y e Assistant Control Panel Area 2 ACS CP L Rev E e Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev M See page 70 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9907 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels 58 Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel No Use a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel 1 LCD display Divided into f
165. a new value for the parameter with keys lt and Cw Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE SAVE To save the new value press wih ae CANCEL e To cancel the new value and keep the original press w LOC U PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels How to select the monitored signals 75 Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they LOC UPAR EDIT are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 74 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM detailed instructions on changing parameter values OUTPUT FREQ By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals 103 depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose CANCEL 00 00 SAVE default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED LOC UPAR EDIT the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE CURRENT respectively 104 To change the default signals select up
166. able for the application USER S3 SAVE Save User 3 macro Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 5 model 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode SCALAR FREQ VECTOR SPEED Sensorless vector control mode 1 Reference 1 speed reference in rpm Reference 2 speed reference in percent 100 is the absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed value VECTOR TORQ Vector control mode 2 Reference 1 speed reference in rpm Reference 2 torque reference in percent 100 equals nominal torque SCALAR FREQ Scalar control mode 3 Reference 1 frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 frequency reference in percent 100 is the absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed value Actual signals and parameters 240 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage Must be equal to the value on the motor 230 V 200 V rating plate The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than units the input power voltage 400 V 400 V Output voltage units Eur 9905 460 V 400 V unit
167. ables the encoder DISABLE DISABLE Disabled 0 ENABLE Enabled 1 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the operation of the drive if a failure is detected in communication FAULT between the pulse encoder and the pulse encoder interface module or between the module and the drive FAULT The drive trips on fault ENCODER ERR 1 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERROR 2 5010 ZPLSENABLE Enables the encoder zero Z pulse Zero pulse is used for position reset DISABLE DISABLE Disabled 0 ENABLE Enabled 1 5011 POSITION RESET Enables the position reset DISABLE DISABLE Disabled 0 ENABLE Enabled 1 51 EXT COMM The parameters need to be adjusted only when a fieldbus adapter module MODULE optional is installed and activated by parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL For more details on the parameters refer to the manual of the fieldbus module and chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is changed Note In adapter module the parameter group number is 1 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module NOT DEFINED Fieldbus module is not found or it is not properly connected or parameter 0 9802 COMM PROT SEL setting is not EXT FBA PROFIBUS DP Profibus adapter module 1 CANopen CANopen adapter module 32 DEVICENET DeviceNet adapter module 37 5102 FBPAR 2 These parameters are adapter module specific For more information see the module manual Note that not all of these parame
168. age 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is detected inthe ENABLE motor or the motor cable Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended DISABLE No action 0 ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 1 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break The time NOT SEL delay is defined by parameter 3079 COMM FAULT TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive 0 FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR and coasts to stops CONST SP 7 Protection is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and sets the speed 2 to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 201 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates alarm IO COMM and freezes the 3 speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of A a communication break 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break supervision See 3 parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 0 60 0 s Delay time 1 01s 3021 Ali FAULT LIMIT Defines a fault level fo
169. age 254 1010 COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation through 0302 FB CMD 40032 JOGGING WORD 2 bits 20 and 21 bits 20 SEL and 21 1102 EXT1 COMM Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection through 0301 FB CMD 40001 40031 EXT2 SEL WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB Drives profile 5379 EFB PAR bit 11 bit 5 19 bit 11 1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is 40002 for REF1 SELECT COMM AI1 selected as the active control location See section COMM AI1 Fieldbus references on page 249 for information on the alternative settings 1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is 40003 for REF2 SELECT COMM AI1 selected as the active control location See section COMM AI1 Fieldbus references on page 249 for information on the alternative settings OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by signal 0134 COMM 40134 for signal 0134 OUTPUT 1 COMM 1 RO WORD 1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference 0135 COMM 40135 for signal 0135 CONTENT VALUE 1 to analog output AO SEL SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV DCU 1601 RUN COMM Enables the control of the inverted Run Enable signal 40001 40031 ENABLE Run Disable through 0307 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 bit 3 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through fieldbus 0307 FB CMD 40001 40031 RESET SEL WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR bit 7 bit 4 19 bit 7 1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mod
170. ails see parameters 3406 and 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3407 OUTPUT MAX 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels 76 Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control The Start up Assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section Start up Assistant on page 95 In the Assistants mode you can e use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing EP repeatedly until y
171. al line port must be initialized and restarted and all of its communication event counters cleared If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode no response is returned If the port is not currently in Listen Only Mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to Listen Only Mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The only function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function subcode 01 Write Multiple Holding Registers 10 16 Writes to the registers 1 to approximately 120 registers in a slave device Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers Read Write Multiple Holding Registers 17 23 Performs a combination of one read operation and one write operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single modbus transaction The write operation is performed before the read operation Register mapping The drive parameters Control Status Word references and actual values are mapped to the area 4xxxx so that e 40001 40099 are reserved for drive control status reference and actual values e 40101 49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101 9999 E g 40102 is parameter 0102 In this mapping the
172. al source 3622 DI as booster activation signal source 4010 4110 4210 Dl as PID controller reference signal source 4022 4122 Dl as sleep function activation signal in PID1 4027 Dl as PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection signal source 4228 Dl as external PID2 function activation signal source Group 84 SEQUENCE PROG Dl as sequence programming control signal source Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output By means of a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms It is possible to write a value to a relay output through a serial communication link Settings Parameter Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times 8423 RO control with sequence programming Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0134 RO Control Word through fieldbus control 0162 RO status Program features Frequency input 105 Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input Frequency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update ti
173. alled on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged 2 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 Connect the optional brake resistor to the BRK and BRK terminals with a shielded cable using the same procedure as for the motor cable in step 3 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically Disconnecting EMC screw Connecting power cables and frame size RO R3 grounding 29 2299e Disconnecting EMC screw frame size R4 e E ul EA vi MAINS faci i Ni el Wayuda a e BRK BRK Electrical installation 40 Connecting the control cables 1 O terminals The figure below shows the I O connectors Tightening to
174. allowed See Mechanical installation Requirements for the installation site on page 26 Technical data Cooling air flow requirements on page 292 and Ambient conditions on page 298 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free space around the drive on page 26 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning electrical installation Motor selection on page 29 and Technical data Motor connection on page 296 For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over two years The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque The motor cable is routed away from other cables The external control I O connections are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place Installation checklist 44 Installation checklist 45 Start up control with I O and ID Run
175. alue 0 0 6553 5 MWh Megawatt hours If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is disabled 1 0 1 MWh 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption counter When 0 parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 MWh Megawatt hours Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 MWh 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Programmable protection functions 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal falls below the set NOT SEL minimum limit NOT SEL Protection is inactive 0 FAULT The drive trips on fault Al1 Al2 LOSS and the motor coasts to stop Fault limit 1 is defined by parameter 3021 3022 Al1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and sets the speed to the value 2 defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case A the analog input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm Al1 Al2 LOSS and freezes the speed to the level 3 the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 3022 AI1 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case AN
176. alue of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV 1 UNDER Relay energises when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Value of supervised parameter HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Y Y A Case A A Energized 1 mnao t 0 gt Case B A Energized 1 TefLelL i 0 E Example 2 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO gt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO making it the active limit The new limit remains active until the supervised signal drops below the lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI making it the active limit Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal exceeds the active limit Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay is de energized whenever the supervised signal drops below the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit A LO par 3202
177. alue scaling Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 273 Fault tracing What this chapter contains Safety A The chapter lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on the first pages before you work with the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 287 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the alarm fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapters Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus and Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter How to reset RESET EXIT The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key Basic Control Panel or gt Assistant Control Panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltage off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in the Fault History The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0401 LAST FAUL
178. ameter 2014 MAX 300 TORQUE SEL 0 0 600 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2019 BRAKE CHOPPER Old parameter Left out in sw version 2 51b and later See parameter 2202 2020 BRAKE CHOPPER Selects the brake chopper control Only in sw version 2 51b or later INBUILT INBUILT Internal brake chopper control 0 Note Ensure the brake resistor s is installed and the overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE EXTERNAL External brake chopper control Note The drive is compatible only with ABB ACS BRK X brake units Note Ensure the brake unit is installed and the overvoltage control is switched off by setting parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL to selection DISABLE Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 21 START STOP Description Start and stop modes of the motor 183 Def FbEq 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method AUTO AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREA If flying start is required use selection SCAN START If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR SPEED VECTOR TORQ the drive pre magnetises the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetising time is defined by parameter 2703 DC MAGN TIME See selection DC MAGN 1 DC MAGN The drive pre mag
179. ameters 1904 1911 CNTR UNDER State change when counter value is below the limit defined by par 1905 49 COUNTER LIMIT See parameters 1904 1911 LOGIC VAL State change according to logic operation defined by parameters 8406 8410 50 ENTER SETPNT State change when drive output frequency speed enters the reference area 51 i e the difference is less than or equal to 4 of the maximum reference AT SETPOINT State change when drive output frequency speed equals the reference value 52 is within tolerance limits i e the error is less than or equal to 1 of the maximum reference Al1 L1 8 DI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8472 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value and when 53 DI5 is active Al2 L2 8 DI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8474 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value and when 54 DI5 is active Al H1 8 DI5 State change when Al1 value gt par 8477 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value and when 55 DI5 is active Al2 H2 8 DI5 State change when Al1 value gt par 8473 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and when 56 DI5 is active Ali L1 8 DI4 State change when Al1 value lt par 8472 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value and when 57 DI4 is active Al2 L2 8 D14 State change when Al1 value lt par 8474 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value and when 58 DI4 is active Al H1 amp DI4 State change when Al1 value gt par 8477 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value and when 59 DI4 is active Al2 H2 8 DI4 State change when Al1 value gt par 8473 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and when 60 DI4 is active DLY AND DI1 State cha
180. an extra hour Parameter Setting 3602 START TIME 1 08 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 15 30 00 3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY 3606 START TIME 2 12 00 00 3607 STOP TIME 2 15 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY 3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY 3623 BOOSTER TIME 01 00 00 Settings Parameter Additional information Timer 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed functions settings 1001 1002 Timed start stop control 1102 Timed EXT1 EXT2 selection 1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation 1209 Timed speed selection 1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO 4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection 4228 Timed external PID2 activation 8402 Timed sequence programming activation 8425 8435 8495 8426 8436 8496 Sequence programming state change trigger with timed function Drive start and stop can be controlled with timer functions Settings Parameter Additional information 1001 1002 Start Stop signal sources 19 TIMER amp COUNTER Timer for start and stop Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0165 Start stop control time count Program features 133 Counter Drive start and stop can be controlled with counter functions The counter function can also be used as state chang
181. ant control panel 5 NEDERLANDS Dutch Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 6 FRANCAIS French Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 7 DANSK Danish Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 8 SUOMI Finnish Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 9 SVENSKA Swedish Available with ACS CP A assistant control panel 10 RUSSKI Russian Available with ACS CP L assistant control panel 11 POLSKI Polish Available with ACS CP L assistant control panel 12 T RK E Turkish Available with ACS CP L assistant control panel 13 CZECH Czech Available with ACS CP L assistant control panel 14 Magyar Hungarian Available with ACS CP L assistant control panel Note This selection will be added later 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects the application macro See chapter Application macros ABB STANDARD ABB STANDARD Standard macro for constant speed applications 1 3 WIRE 3 wire macro for constant speed applications 2 ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse applications 3 MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control applications 4 HAND AUTO Hand Auto macro to be used when two control devices are connected to the 5 drive Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT1 Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time Switching between EXT1 2 through digital i
182. arameters complete descriptions 215 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4003 DERIVATION TIME Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller Derivative action 0 boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Filter time constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Error 4 Process error value 100 gt t PID outp u D part of controller output Gain 4001 gt t 4003 gt 0 0 10 0 s Derivation time If parameter value is set to zero the derivative part of the 1 0 1s PID controller is disabled 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the process PID 1 controller Increasing the filter time smooths the derivative and reduces noise 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant If parameter value is set to zero the derivative filter is 1 0 1s disabled 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and drive speed NO NO Normal A decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref 0 Fbk YES Inverted A decrease in feedbac
183. arizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel No Use 1 Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LEDs on page 287 2a Loc Y 49 1Hz 2 LCD display Divided into three main areas j 49 1 HZ a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 68 b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display 3 Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function 4 Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function 5 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display e Increments a value if a parameter is selected e Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 6 Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected e Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LO
184. as2 10 10 ooa 10 18 oxoear2 16 15 25 12 1s 03x 07A5 2 16 15 03x 09A8 2 16 20 03x 13A3 2 25 30 03x 17A6 2 25 35 03x 24A4 2 63 60 03x 31A0 2 80 80 03x 46A2 2 100 100 oxoa2a 10 10 osoasa 10 10 09502444 10 10 ocosasa 10 10 oxosata 16 15 0ax 05A64 16 15 25 72 OScOTAGA 16 20 0 BE 0ax 08A84 20 25 03x 12A5 4 25 30 03x 15A6 4 35 35 03x 23A1 4 50 50 03x 31A0 4 80 80 03x 38A0 4 100 100 03x 44A0 4 100 100 00353783 xls H 1 If 50 overload capacity is needed use the bigger fuse alternative Technical data 295 Power cables terminal sizes maximum cable diameters and tightening torques Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 BRK and PE size diameter for NEMA 1 BRK U1 V1 W1 BRK and Terminal size Tightening Clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 BRK torque torque mm in mm in mm AWG Nm Ibfin mm AWG N m Ibfin RO 16 0 63 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R1 16 0 63 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R2 16 0 63 16 0 63 4 0 6 0 10 0 8 7 25 3 1 2 11 R3 29 1 14 16 0 63 10 0 16 0 6 1 7 15 25 3 1 2 11 R4 35 1 38 29 1 14 25 0 35 0 2 2 5 22 25 3 12 11 00353783 xls G Dimensions weights and noise
185. ase Jog Start Description cmd cmd 1 2 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 2 3 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed 3 4 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 4 5 0 0 Drive is stopped 5 6 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration ramp of the jogging function 6 7 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed 7 8 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp 8 9 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows the speed reference 9 10 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration ramp 10 11 0 0 Drive is stopped 11 12 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp 12 13 x 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging Drive follows he speed reference 13 14 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function 14 15 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed 15 16 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp of the jogging function x state can be either 1 or 0 Note The jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on Note The jogging speed overrides the constant speeds Note The jogging uses ramp stop even if parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION selection is COAST N
186. asy customisation of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to LOAD FD SET DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists 0 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list Does not include short parameter list Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible 18 FREQ IN 8 TRAN Frequency input and transistor output signal processing OUT 1801 FREQ INPUT MIN Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a frequency input See 0 section Frequency input on page 105 0 10000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 1Hz 1802 FREQ INPUT MAX Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a frequency input 1000 See section Frequency input on page 105 0 10000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 1Hz 1803 FILTER FREQ IN Defines the filter time constant for frequency input i e the time within 63 of 0 1 a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 105 0 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO See section DIGITAL Transistor output on page 105 DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO 0 Actual signals and parameters 176 Parameters complete descriptions Index Na
187. ate change when Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value 6 Al 1 HIGH 1 State change when Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value 7 Al 2 LOW 1 State change when Al2 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value 8 Al 2 HIGH 1 State change when Al2 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value 9 Al1 OR 2 LO1 State change when Al1 or Al2 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value 10 AI1LO1AI2HI1 State change when Al1 value lt par 8472 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value and Al2 11 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value Al1L01 ORDI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8472 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value or when 12 DI5 is active AI2HI1 ORDI5 State change when Al2 value gt par 8477 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value or when 13 DI5 is active Al 1 LOW 2 State change when Al1 value lt par 8474 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value 14 Al 1 HIGH 2 State change when Al1 value gt par 8473 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value 15 Al 2 LOW 2 State change when Al2 value lt par 8474 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value 16 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 235 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq Al 2 HIGH 2 State change when Al2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value 17 Al1 OR 2 LO2 State change when Al1 or Al2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value 18 AlMLO2AI2HI2 State change when Al1 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value and Al2 19 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value A
188. ater in this section describe the Control Word content for the ABB Drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the following block diagram ABB Drives profile Control Word parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Comments 0 OFF1 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp 2203 2206 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 Emergency OFF drive coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 Emergency stop drive stops within time defined by par 2208 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode 3 INHIBIT 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run Enable signal must be active see OPERATION parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run Enable signal 0 Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED 4 Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ENABLED io 0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCE
189. ates on a 2 ms time level Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed 7 1208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for fault functions See parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Constant speed 6 or 7 1207 CONST SPEED 6 1208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for jogging function See section Jogging on page 129 Program features 112 Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient e g when motor break away torque needs to be boosted Voltage V par 2618 par 2616 par 2614 Custom Uff ratio par 2612 par 2610 par 2603 f Hz par 2611 par 2613 par 2615 par 2617 par 9907 Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 damage overheating f WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor Settings Parameter Additional information 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings Diagnostics Fault Additional information PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio Program features 113 Speed controller tuning It is
190. ates vd ancora an da dia 161 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS oir is oe hee apa wil Pe eed A AAA 164 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS iii ee te a diet eh Sead being ld ne bene ead aly Ged bats 167 14 RELAY OUTPUT Sis te no i dete cal ae A aed ek ea ai dear ae 168 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS sac iuris ra Dehn dad wicks a Melodie Say wh ees 170 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS a sib dete nF eee ea ahs wha dd ee wed a ee ee 171 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT 235 S A Green Bae Got ne ata a dat 175 19 TIMER 8 COUNTER sirnak aan a a ade E r a eee eens 176 20 EIMIT S sia as is o o a 180 ZESTARTS TORA A Re dns Da Ad 183 22 ACCEUDECE a o a o 186 23 SPEED CONTROL A e Bee 189 24 TORQUE CONTROL 4205 bis a a i Se he 191 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS reou ns aa a e eb Is La ar eal gd ea ts 192 26 MOTOR CONTROL wis ack dee ede ees eee Ped oe eee ae dae ee dea ee 192 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG uta ia dete eh ted being Sie a he fe a ae ted Bas 195 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS is ac cca ce naa a A hi a D Gables 196 31 AUTOMATICRESET oc bas ened baa do Ee OR head Mele aed BAG We OR 201 32 SUPERVISION oia dite AA wae ea ee ed a ae ees 203 3SINFORMATI N 00d ido ees od iat dad Beebe ere ee eee AOS a 204 34 PANEL DISPLAY uote ued edhe ta ad 205 35 MOTOR TEMP MBAS sxe nadete ely ated dee g pi dad Adee wegen dd RA HE Pb aE E 209 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS cuicos des es Pe es hana we de Oa Pe eS 211 40 PROGESS PID SET Vivian wow acs ete ay a Risin bed ind Seated std sae ae eee a 214 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 aae a a ea E enn e een e enna 2
191. ault 1 DO Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Fault 1 Application macros ABB Standard macro This is the default macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in chapter Actual signals and parameters starting from page 142 87 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Default I O connections 1 10 kohm max 500 ohm O7 X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen J ra E gt 2 Al Output frequency reference 0 10 V 1 va E 3 GND Analog input circuit common J 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA 5 Al2 Not in use by default 0 10 V 6 GND Analog input circuit common E 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA i En 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI Stop 0 Start 1 13 DI2 Forward 0 Reverse 1 14 DI3 Constant speed selection 2 15 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 a 16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 19 RONO mn 20 DOSRC Digital output ma
192. ault for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively To change the default signals select up to three signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 07 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 i e no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A LOC 103 PAR FWD 104 PAR FWD 105 PAR FWD Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3477 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3478 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM LOC 9 PAR FWD Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT
193. below foutput HZ 1 Par 2502 18 Hz A 2 Par 2503 23 Hz 52 ahann 3 Par 2504 46 Hz 46 4 Par 2505 52 Hz 23 18 a aan gt freference HZ 123 4 OFF Inactive 0 ON Active 1 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Defines the minimum limit for critical speed frequency range 1 0 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in rpm Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm SCALAR FREQ The value cannot be above the maximum parameter 2503 1 rpm CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Defines the maximum limit for critical speed frequency range 1 0 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in rpm Limit in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm SCALAR FREQ The value cannot be below the minimum parameter 2502 1 rpm CRIT SPEED 1 LO 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 26 MOTOR CONTROL Motor control variables 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Activates deactivates the flux optimisation function Flux optimisation reduces the t
194. bus or PC tool Fieldbus adapter connection X3 Fieldbus 1 adapter Standard I O Potentiometer Program features 98 Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel toc gt 49 Loc HZ 0 5 A 10 7 OUTPUT DIR 00 00 MENU 491 The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local mode External control When the drive is in external control the commands are given through the standard 1 O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant panel GD 49 i 4911 Basic panel O 10 7 OUTPUT DIR 00 00 MENU The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level Settings Panel key Additional information LOC REM Selection between local and external control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Referenc
195. bus controller 101 9999 5501 5510 FBA 0 Defines the data transmitted from fieldbus DATA OUT 1 10 1 6 controller to drive 101 9999 Note In adapter module the parameter group number is 3 for 54 FBA DATA IN and 2 for 55 FBA DATA OUT After the module configuration parameters in group 51 EXT COMM MODULE have been set the drive control parameters shown in section Drive control parameters on page 269 must be checked and adjusted when necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH is activated Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Drive control parameters 269 After the fieldbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted where necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for fieldbus control Function Information CONTROL COMMAND SO URCE SELECTION 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS COMM Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT1 is selected as the active control location 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS COMM Selects fieldbus as the source for the start and stop commands when EXT2 is selected as the active con
196. by falling edge of digital input DI1 state machine is reset to state 1 New start command can be activated by digital input D11 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously active 1 0 second ramp time drive is accelerated decelerated as rapidly as possible 2 State reference must be between 0 100 i e scaled Al1 value must be between 15 85 If Al1 0 reference 0 35 50 15 lt 0 Parameter Setting Additional information 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS SEQ PROG Start stop direction commands for EXT2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL EXT2 EXT2 activation 1106 REF2 SELECT Al1 SEQ PROG Addition of analog input Al1 and sequence programming output as REF2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL NOT SEL Deactivation of constant speeds 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 SEQ PROG Relay output RO control as defined by parameter 8423 8493 1601 RUN ENABLE NOT SEL Deactivation of Run Enable 1805 DO SIGNAL SEQ PROG Digital output DO control as defined by parameter 8423 8493 2102 STOP FUNCTION RAMP Ramp stop 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL SEQ PROG Ramp as defined by parameter 8422 8492 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 1s Acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Os 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 20s Acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 2206 DECELER TIME 2 20s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 5s Shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 171 Sequence coun
197. c value 3 and the result of the NOT SEL first logic operation defined by parameter 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 8410 SEQ LOGIC VAL 3 See parameter 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 NOT SEL 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 8425 0 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to e g Al1 HIGH 1 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 8425 0 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to e g Al1 LOW 1 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH Defines the high limit for the state change when parameter 8425 0 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to e g Al2 HIGH 1 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW Defines the low limit for the state change when parameter 8425 0 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 is set to e g Al2 LOW 2 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC Activates the cycle counter for sequence programming NOT SEL 8416 CYCLE CNT RST Selects the source for the cycle counter reset signal 0171 SEQ NOT SEL CYCLE CNTR 8420 ST1 REF SEL Selects the source for the sequence programming state 1 0 reference 8421 ST1 COMMANDS Selects the start stop and direction for state 1 DRIVE STOP 8422 ST1 RAMP Selects the acceleration deceleration ramp time for sequence 0 programming state 1 i e defines the rate of the reference change 8423 ST1 OUT CONTROL Selects the relay transistor and analog output control for AO 0 sequence programming state 1 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY Defines the delay time for state 1 0 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the state NOT SEL from
198. cal Speeds iuris ps BOR SOS REN ES haa ia es 110 SOMOS iia EAT Be eee E as Bd Geese eked Gee eae ee 110 Constant speedSici sce ce aed wane ei a hand Sas eh eee pe ek ate halt hed il 111 RTS NE fo vs cae et rte eae ae re a A a Ne O EAL 111 Custom Ulf TAIO aii e iach is wi eae teased ee ibe eh PO ie hen 112 RA he ak MEA 112 DIaQnOStCs veria o a Aiea ed ake aa RES BRE ee ee ee be E 112 Speed controlleF tuning ii Mee we Cw ay dia Aes Bey Gd ded eel Ward aay ek 113 SOMOS orina iG op wd hak eer wel A a Ba eR bag ah ad WARS ail a ee ond E 113 DIagnOSuCs os ssa 38 bh A ee hee aa bua EE Eke a nad bee ae bens 113 Speed control performance figures 0 0000 ccc eee 114 Torque control performance figures 00 00 114 Scalar Control arrere dee wack Ga alee wad wack wanda ay eate AAA os O R e 115 DOUINGS 3 0 ras Sand HS Le Su rs Maw se ae aD Jd Kes da hy geod Mey Pe Midd eee 115 IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive 1 2 ee eee eee 115 Settings a See x Sal aleve wan eid EA a a E AW edd eek NCD AS Ged eet Wat ule eae Se se 115 Programmable protection functions 00 00s 115 AISMIN v3 escrito is nein be Rad ei Sa be oe ea Re 115 Panel bOsss ic cau wits coach eae AA A AA AAA Be Gd ee mae ied 115 ExternalFault ee eit A heat A he ele hha Bee 116 Stall Protection 0 0 0 0 eee eee teens 116 Motor Thermal Protection 0 0 ccc eee 116 Underload Protection sum 0446 dd ha wee eae deh dde 84 We eee a 117
199. calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Def Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the basic control panel as integer values E g parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the integer used in serial communication Fieldbus addresses For FPBA 01 Profibus Adapter FDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter and FCAN 01 CANopen Adapter see the fieldbus adapter user s manual Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2017 MAX TORQ 1 is set from external control system an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0 1 All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Actual signals and parameters 142 Default values with different macros When application macro is changed 9902 APPLIC MACRO the software updates the parameter values to their default values The following table includes the parameter default values for different macros For other parameters the default values are the same for all macros See the following parameter list Index Name Selection ABB 3 WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR HAND PID TORQ STANDARD POT AU
200. ce is unchanged 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in The existing speed reference is stored during stop and power down Application macros Hand Auto macro 91 This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Note Parameter 2708 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen e 5 az 2 Al1 Motor speed reference Hand 0 10 V A rA e 3 GND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA O7 FT 5 Al2 Motor speed reference Auto 4 20 mA 2 6 GND Analog input circuit common max 500 ohm 97 ab 7 JAO Motor speed value 0 20 mA E a 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI Stop 0 Start 1 Hand 13 DI2 Forward 0 Reverse 1 Hand 14 DIS Hand 0 Auto 1 control sele
201. chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation Start up control with I O and ID Run 46 POWER UP Apply input power and wait for a moment Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking The drive is now ready for use How to perform the limited start up For the limited start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY procedure The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician AN The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up A The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist Check that the starting of the motor does not cause a
202. cted by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised signal Supervision limits are defined by 105 parameters 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO and 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1 1 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit X X Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 33 INFORMATION Firmware package version test date etc 3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package 0 0000 FFFF hex E g 241A 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Displays the version of the loading package type dependent 0x2001 0x20FF 0x2001 ACS350 0x Eur GMD hex 3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date 00 00 Date value in format YY WW year week Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 205 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ra
203. cting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS Program features 97 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up Assistant The main displays and the information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display LOC UPAR EDIT LOC WHELP 7 Set exactly as given 1 9905 MOTOR_NOM VOLT on the motor nameplate If_connected to multiple motors EXIT 00 00 SAVE EXIT 00 00 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus or an optional fieldbus adapter enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with DriveWindow Light PC tool can also control the drive Local Control ACS350 External Control Control panel Panel connection X2 Panel connection X2 Embedded or fieldbus FMBA adapter connected to X3 Mod
204. ction 15 DI4 Forward 0 Reverse 1 Auto L __ 16 DI5 Stop 0 Start 1 Auto X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 E 19 RONO O 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA Q 21 DOOUT PI No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 360 degree grounding under a clamp 2 The signal source must be powered externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 47 Tightening torque 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in Application macros 92 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen aw a a A an Motor speed ref Hand Process ref PID 0 10 V 1 4 10 kohm l ra s 3 G
205. ction Reference trimming on page 101 NOT SEL No trim function selected 0 PROPORTIONAL Active The trimming factor is proportional to the rpm Hz reference before trimming REF1 DIRECT Active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the 2 reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 223 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function See section Reference 0 trimming on page 107 100 0 100 0 Multiplier 1 0 1 4232 CORRECTION SRC Selects the trim reference See section Reference trimming on page 101 PID2REF PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 i e signal 0129 PID 2 SETPNT 1 value PID20UTPUT PID2 output i e signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2 4233 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque SPEED reference See section Reference trimming on page 107 FREQ SPEED FREQ Speed reference trimming 0 TORQUE Torque reference trimming only for REF2 1 43 MECH BRK Control of a mechanical brake See section Control of a mechanical brake on CONTROL page 126 4301 BRAKE OPEN DLY Defines the brake open delay the delay between the internal open brake 0 20 command and the release of the motor speed control The delay counter starts when the motor
206. ctrical installation What this chapter contains 0 iene E A E eee 37 Checking the insulation of the assembly 0 0 eens 37 DENG og Sales Draper sweetie deed eae id Meh eda wailed os bo Gad 37 Input Cable vi cc ees Saha ka oes eee A ee Pa Pea eae 37 Motor and motor cable ve ca us ia eee ee eG Gre he A Gwe ere ae 37 Connecting the power cables 2 00 eee ee 38 Connection diagrant renee 80s be a hae ees Ga ee Bae aw 38 Procedure amasan a a ides acd ee pene tee BBs ah ees aes a a 39 Connecting the control Cables 2 00 eee 40 Ot MINAS es et Re i e A GRE Bs ce oO Ne Do co a a 40 PTOCOQUTS usa eee Rae lM wate del A gaa ate ee hale een 42 Installation checklist Checklists heer mar A ti ant A ac ale Gals Pla Mend 43 Start up control with I O and ID Run What this chapter contains 0 0000 eee eee 45 Fow to start up the drives seed odoin eet eo dota had Oe SE OE EG ae we ace 45 How to start up the drive without a control panel 000000 cee eee 45 How to perform the limited start up 0 0 0 000 0 cece tees 46 How to perform the guided start up 0 0 0 0 eee 51 How to control the drive through the I O interface 0 20 00 000 cee eee 53 How to perform the ID RUN a a Hace ee nw wade dhe 54 ID Run procedure ssi meeen a Re eae Bo ea eg ER Ge aa Me ee 54 Table of contents 11 Control panels What this chapter contains o occooooo eee 5
207. cuit x E U Rated 4y and Ion Min Max Ww BTU Hr Ww BTU Hr Ww BTU Hr m h ft min 1 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 01x 02A4 2 25 85 6 1 21 22 7 78 01x 04A7 2 46 157 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 01x 06A7 2 71 242 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 01x 07A5 2 73 249 10 5 36 27 5 94 21 12 01x 09A8 2 96 328 10 5 36 27 5 94 21 12 3 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 03x 02A4 2 19 65 6 1 21 22 7 78 03x 03A5 2 31 106 6 1 21 22 7 78 03x 04A7 2 38 130 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 03x 06A7 2 60 205 9 5 32 26 4 90 24 14 03x 07A5 2 62 212 9 5 32 26 4 90 21 12 03x 09A8 2 83 283 10 5 36 27 5 94 21 12 03x 13A3 2 112 383 10 5 36 27 5 94 52 31 03x 17A6 2 152 519 10 5 36 27 5 94 52 31 03x 24A4 2 250 854 16 6 57 35 4 121 71 42 03x 31A0 2 270 922 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 46A2 2 430 1469 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 3 phase Uy 380 480 V 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 03x 01A2 4 11 38 6 6 23 24 4 83 03x 01A9 4 16 55 6 6 23 24 4 83 03x 02A4 4 21 72 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 03A3 4 31 106 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 04A1 4 40 137 9 8 33 28 7 98 13 8 03x 05A6 4 61 208 9 8 33 28 7 98 19 11 03x 07A3 4 74 253 14 1 48 32 7 112 24 14 03x 08A8 4 94 321 14 1 48 32 7 112 24 14 03x 12A5 4 130 444 12 0 41 31 2 107 52 31 03x 15A6 4 173 591 12 0 41 31 2 107 52 31 03x 23A1 4 266 908 16 6 57 35 4 121 71 42 03x 31A0 4 350 1195 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 38A0 4 440 1503 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 03x 44A0 4 530 1810 33 4 114 57 8 197 96 57 00353783
208. current torque speed has risen to the level required at brake release parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL and the motor has been magnetised Simultaneously with the start of the counter the brake function energises the relay output controlling the brake and the brake starts opening 0 00 2 50 s Delay time 1 0 01s 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL Defines the motor starting torque current at brake release After start the 100 drive current torque is frozen to the set value until the motor is magnetised 0 0 180 0 Value in percent of the nominal torque Ty with vector control or the nominal 1 0 1 current 2y with scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4303 BRAKE CLOSE LVL Defines the brake close speed After stop the brake is closed when drive 4 0 speed falls below the set value 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the nominal speed with vector control or the nominal 1 0 1 frequency with scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL Defines the speed at brake release Parameter setting overrides parameter 0 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL setting After start the drive speed is frozen to the set value until the motor is magnetised The purpose of this parameter is to generate enough start torque to prevent the motor rotating into the wrong direction because of the motor load 0 0 100 Value in percent of the maximum frequency with scalar con
209. cy See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN 1 1 Hz 1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO i e the time within 0 1 63 of a step change is reached 0 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 19 TIMER 8 COUNTER Timer and counter for start and stop control 1901 TIMER DELAY Defines the time delay for the timer 10 0 01 120 00 s Delay time 1 0 01s 1902 TIMER START Selects the source for the timer start signal NOT SEL DI1 INV Timer start through inverted digital input DI1 Timer start by a falling edge of 1 digital input D11 Note Timer start is not possible when reset is active parameter 1903 TIMER RESET DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 177 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No start signal 0 DI Timer start through digital input DI1 Timer start by rising edge of digital input 1 DI1 Note Timer start is not possible when reset is active parameter 1903 TIMER RESET DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 START External start signal e g start signal through fieldbus 6 1903 TIMER RESET Selects the source for the timer reset signal NOT SEL
210. d Usemjeq sjoajes ZOP JE OWeIed 9 pajas Joyuur7 aJ 9011 1 Y 0p tald dnog ZLO DILO 20v VLOV mo Ldld ZOLL 9H i Y anjea 9 i Ja 0JJuO9 Lov did N l Lald u01 98 S i s y YoUMS ye did Yous ZL dnog 9OLL CLXA LLX3 peeds yue suoy e818S Z p ds suog POLL 191 CLXA poads aBeany ZL dnog COLL jaued joyjuoD 9 o dnog Jour p ds l LOLL jue3suoy Joajas e Me way l J91 11X3 i 00S paads eh 00S wuejy YyouMs N3Y 901 901 Jou joued YOUMS Q0LL yn apur 424 E90 sLv LYLY cOv YOY A NO LdId i anJen 9 SN zo ued pu LOV did uo1 99 S JIM Y9HMS pe did LOV NINO JOMOd enbo yang IV Program features 122 Settings Parameter Additional information 1101 Local control mode reference type selection 1102 EXT1 2 selection 1106 PID1 activation 1107 REF2 minimum limit 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Group 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Group 42 EXT TRIM PID PID2 settings Diagnostics Actual Signals Additional information 0126 0127 PID 1 2 output value 0128 0129 PID 1 2 setpoint value 0130 0131 PID 1 2 feedback value 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation 0170 AO value defined by sequence programming Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep
211. d with relay or transistor output 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised signal 103 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised signal 104 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Actual signals and parameters Parameters short form list 153 Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised signal 105 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 33 INFORMATION Firmware package version test date etc 3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Displays the version of the loading package type dependent 3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date 00 00 3304 DRIVE RATING Dis
212. daily stop time 1 The time can be changed in 2 second steps 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 59 58 hours minutes seconds Example If parameter value is set to 18 00 00 the timed function is deactivated at 18 00 6 p m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1 MONDAY MONDAY 1 TUESDAY Example If parameter value is set to MONDAY timed function 1 is active 2 from Monday midnight 00 00 00 WEDNESDAY 3 THURSDAY 4 FRIDAY 5 SATURDAY 6 SUNDAY 7 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1 MONDAY See parameter 3604 If parameter is set to FRIDAY timed function 1 is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 Actual signals and parameters 212 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3610 START TIME 3 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3611 STOP TIME 3 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 3612 START DAY 3 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3613 STOP DAY 3 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1
213. default O Al2 Analog input circuit common O GND Aux voltage output O 24 V 24 VDC max 200 mA Aux voltage output common O GND PROGRAMMABLE RELAY AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS Digital input common 0 DCOM Stop Start D PONC o AT VDC Forward Reverse Constant speed selection Constant speed selection Digital output PNP transistor type 30 VDC max 100 mA Acceler and y deceler selection 1 PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL INPUTS ABB Standard macro defaults shown T D n a gt U O ho Encoder EMC filter grounding screw Fieldbus adapter m VAR Varistor grounding screw DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP ES 9 9 CANopen Modbus RTU RS 485 L1 U1 u25 T 3 phase power supply L2 OV1 V2 07 AC motor Brake chopper L3 OW1 BRK BRK W2 O T oO Y y A A Joelle eal 2200 1 DI5 can also be used as a t Brake resistor frequency input 1 Hardware description Type code 23 The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type code on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS350 03E 08A8 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type code selections are described below ACS350 03E 08
214. ding those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 1608 START ENABLE 1 COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start Enable 1 Start Disable signal 1609 START ENABLE 2 COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start Enable 2 Start Disable signal LIMITS 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the minimum torque limit 1 2 selection 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the maximum torque limit 1 2 selection 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 2 selection 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 270 TIME Parameter Setting for Function Information fieldbus control COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS 3018 COMM FAULT NOT SEL Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost FUNC FAULT CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT 0 1 60 0 s Defines the time between communication loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION 40101411014210 SET POINT SEL COMM COMM AI1 COMM AI1 PID control reference REF2 The fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit in
215. dition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions Addition subtraction multiplication and division The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions Addition and multiplication The drive reference can be given with frequency input In external control location EXT1 2 the drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through sequence programming by using a mathematical function Addition It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits Settings Parameter Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE External reference source type and scaling SELECT Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramps Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque reference ramp times Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference processing chain
216. e 1 is compared to logic NOT SEL value 2 as defined by parameter 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 Logic operation values are used in state transitions See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N selection LOGIC VAL DI1 INV Logic value 1 through inverted digital input DI1 INV 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No logic value 0 DI1 Logic value 1 through digital input D11 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 SUPRV1 OVER Logic value according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 See 6 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 OVER Logic value according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 See 7 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 OVER Logic value according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 See 8 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 UNDER See selection SUPRV 10VER 9 SUPRV2 UNDER See selection SUPRV 20VER 10 SUPRV3 UNDER See selection SUPRV 3OVER 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Logic value 1 is activated by timed function 1 See parameter group 36 12 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 timed function active TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 13 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 14 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 15 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 Selects the operation between logic value 1 and 2 Logic operation values NOT SEL are used in state transitions See
217. e Vine haa baie BY wed a AAA a a 120 External Trim controller PID2 1 0 0 cee 120 Block diagrams clown bby bees teh esa ew ba aoe ee dag Mee aati es 120 A etude gee Nae E dane EA he 122 Diagnostiese sa tence aig E Bee ae ks eect Tope aed Ghee ieee hose ot 122 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control aana ee 122 Example ociosa pede Mee feta he ee Pei hae Ree RP het a 123 Settings eraat A O Bid dee EE a 123 DiagnOSules mit sens Sei ae jae bap Piha haar ca 123 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O 0 0 0 ee 124 SENGS eane Soe OSS rs Shs be bee a eed Done aed ies Soe a ee aa 125 DIAQNOStIES us sar A Peewee ne oleae te Eee aes pad ata aes 125 Control of a mechanical brake 0 0 0 eee ees 126 EXAMPLE 200 La en et wiv digas id e AA EA AAA aie ay Reid A ARE 126 Operation time scheme 0 127 State ShittS es i soba ie ade oP AO 128 Settings sa eee See RENO RE Seine Sle OOM ee eee ed OMe ee A deo dee he 128 SOQ GING iii eae hee A Seat eR aan a Beg ata a sate ee rane Gea bee 129 Settings srta re Cie il ir sd CAR eRe oi eee Web eee he dhe mate ed 130 Diagnostics 2 easels e Yoga hee te a lets et ele gee ee LCR ag duh Pepa etn dee Pe 130 TIM CTUNCTIONS eiser a eR es Eee el is ee Oa PRO ER a eae aes SOS 131 Settings rora a doe ae Leas We aie A eared aw Las ead A AAA 132 TUNG is A it rd ee Rie an sc Patt ee einen MS MS e ed 132 Setting S cs esis eh hee DE te ee iO whet heed ee a es eh ie
218. e chapter Fault tracing No fault OFF_2 STA OFF2 inactive OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBITED Switch on inhibit not active ALARM Alarm See chapter Fault tracing No alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is within tolerance limits i e in speed control the speed error is less than or equal to 4 1 of the nominal motor speed Asymmetric hysteresis 4 when speed enters the reference area 1 when speed exits the reference area Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Oj oO Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location EXT2 selected External control location EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received oO oj gt No External Run Enable received 13 Reserved Fieldbus cont
219. e e a a eee 296 Motor connections easa i arai A e a a A E e a E oe ee a ds aia eee 2 h 296 Control CONNECIONS ica ee A A A E O 297 Brake resistor connection 00 000 eee eae 297 ETICIENCY iia beh od we CA Ties whee an tyke bd ele es oe ae be aa 297 E E rad dra eg a Sh AAR GR ae NS AS E era waar ak a oy 297 Degrees of protection eid ok been eda ds Ree POE Rew ER ee eae de we ee dea ees 297 Ambient conditions x imss yea we dee oe ae ed eh eee Ped Se nw ee dale ae eee 298 MaterlalS oc ir bate PS wa eke meh ead Galak Oe ek GOR a A Guha we ek laa bd we be 298 CE MAKING ever de abs ees Leah avs geeks ls ae esetnas 299 Compliance with the EMC Directive 0 0 0 000 ccc ee eee 299 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 0 0 0 0 cc eee 299 ETC MARIDO A Ok PEN GRE Se aw ea 299 Compliance with IEC 61800 3 2004 0 0 2 0 02 eee 299 ROS IMAGING Rd 299 Applicable standards vt ee A ea te As Re Md ad OME aini 299 UEM EA A e e eer BOS tee ie TA Be at Sderot 300 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 20 00 02 nee 300 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 0 00002 cette 301 Product protection in the USA 301 Brake resistors fav vais ii ton eels a by ged E ee ee aed Ga eae hee ek oe a 302 Brake resistor selection 000 ce ee 302 Resistor installation and wiring 0000 cece eee 304 Mandatory circuit protection s es aaa aaee eee eae 304 Parameter Set up tc e eae Pe eee A et habeas 3
220. e for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable a b A double shielded twisted A single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen e g OLFLEX by LAPPKABEL has been tested and approved by ABB Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Connection of a motor temperature sensor to the drive I O Please refer to section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 124 for information on connecting a motor temperature sensor to the drive I O Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables be installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with
221. e lock signal through 0307 FB CMD 40031 LOCK WORD 1 bit 14 bit 14 1607 PARAM DONE SAVE Saves parameter value changes including those made 41607 SAVE through fieldbus control to permanent memory Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 247 Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus control address 1608 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 1 Start Disable through 0302 FB 40032 ENABLE 1 CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 18 1609 START COMM Inverted Start Enable 2 Start Disable through 0302 FB 40032 ENABLE 2 CMD WORD 2 bit 19 bit 19 LIMITS ABB DRV DCU 2013 MIN COMM Minimum torque limit 1 2 selection through 0301 FB 40031 TORQUE CMD WORD 1 bit 15 bit 15 SEL 2014 MAX COMM Maximum torque limit 1 2 selection through 0301 FB 40031 TORQUE CMD WORD 1 bit 15 bit 15 SEL 2201 ACC COMM ACC DEC ramp pair selection through 0301 FB CMD 40031 DEC 1 2 SEL WORD 1 bit 10 bit 10 2209 RAMP COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 40001 40031 INPUT O 13 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 bit 6 bit 13 COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV DCU 3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication 43018 FAULT FUNC FAULT is lost CONST SP 7 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM 0 1 60 0 s Defines the time between communication loss detection 43019 FAULT TIME and the action selected with parameter 3078 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE S
222. e mapped to Modbus register 40008 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5314 EFB PAR 14 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40009 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5315 EFB PAR 15 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40010 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5316 EFB PAR 16 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40011 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 5317 EFB PAR 17 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40012 0 0 65535 Parameter index 1 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 227 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 5318 EFB PAR 18 Reserved 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read 0x0000 only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 0x0000 0xFFFF hex Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read 0x0000 only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word 0x0000 0xFFFF hex Status Word 54 FBA DATA IN Data from drive to fieldbus controller via a fieldbus adapter See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Note In adapter module the parameter group number is 3 5401 FBADATAIN 1 Selects data to be transferred from the drive to the fieldbus controller 0 Not in use 1 6 Control and status data words 5401 setting Data word 1 Control Word 2 REF1 3 REF2 4 Status
223. e motor cable 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication break NOT SEL 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3 supervision 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Defines a fault level for analog input Al MINIMUM Al1 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 MINIMUM Al2 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and ENABLE motor cable connection is detected 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs 0 within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL TIME 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function 30 3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before 0 attempting an automatic reset 3104 AROVERCURRENT _ Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent DISABLE fault 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate DISABLE link overvoltage fault 3106 ARUNDERVOLTAGE Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate DISABLE link undervoltage fault 3107 AR Al lt MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI lt MIN DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the EXTERNAL DISABLE FAULT 1 2 32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision Supervision status can be monitore
224. e partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 94 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Copy USER S3 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET3 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 82 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing ul if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys ENTER Cay and S yY 7 and pressing ST LOC UPAR BACKU
225. e source for EXT1 EXT2 Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference Program features 99 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for external control location EXT1 D D11 Select DI5 DIS C EXxT1 Fb selection oder See chapters Fieldbus som irection Embedded fieldbus ________ control with embedded A fieldbus and Fieldbus 1001 Fieldbus adapter control with fieldbus adapter KEYPAD Control panel 7 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Timed function Timer Counter START STOP Sequence programming SEQ PROG Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EXT1 Al Al1 Al2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Select Al2 DI3 EXT1 DI4 Fb selection C Reference DI5 See chapters Fieldbus REF1 Hz rpm control with embedded COMM Embedded fieldbus fieldbus and Fieldbus 1103 control with fieldbus Fieldbus adapter adapter Frequency input FREQ INPUT Control panel KEYPAD Sequence programming SEQ PROG Program features 100 Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in ad
226. e trigger signal in sequence programming See section Sequence programming on page 133 Settings Parameter Additional information 1001 1002 Start Stop signal sources 19 TIMER amp COUNTER Counter for start and stop 8425 8426 8435 8436 Counter signal as state change trigger in sequence programming 8495 8496 Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0166 Start stop control pulse count Sequence programming The drive can be programmed to perform a sequence where the drive shifts typically through 1 to 8 states User defines the operation rules for the whole sequence and for each state The rules of a particular state are effective when the sequence program is active and the program has entered the state The rules to be defined for each state are Run stop and direction commands for the drive forward reverse stop Acceleration and deceleration ramp time for the drive Source for the drive reference value State duration e RO DO AO status Signal source for triggering the shift to next state Signal source for triggering the shift to any state 1 8 Every state can also activate drive outputs to give an indication to external devices Sequence programming allows state transitions either to the next state or to a selected state State change can be activated with e g timed functions digital inputs and supervision functions Sequence programming can be applied in simple mixer applications as
227. e tune the reference of the drive See section Reference trimming on page 107 Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump PID ref ref ACS350 4001 k 4002 ti Switch g requenc Actual values 4003 td T EA l oe dicas 4004 dFiltT ae N 4021 4005 errVinv HE RARO PlDmax oh S Teena H PlDmin o1 9904 0 IMOT ref 4010 Program features 121 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process controller PID1 DOYdA OAS IV 2J9J J9ue y LOV INNO9 JOMOd nb o juano IV OAS ZIV IV ZJ9J joued OAS ZIV IV 1191 joueg 2J9J eue y ELLVZLLD OLLV OLOV LOv ZLov Ly pue Op dnoi6 a i z pue as JeyewWeJed Ai
228. ea state To Red if pon ea otherwise a fault will be ESE Ae td ae nae Denne a generated and then a ee eon POWT remove the panel to be pie Une MIG able to see the LEDs NVE POWSI At the top left corner of Panel has no power or Green Drive in a normal state Green Drive in an alarm state the Assistant Control no drive connection AE Red Drive in a fault state To Red Panel reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or switch off the drive power Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 288 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 289 Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive e g the ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Technical data 290 Ratings Current and power The current and power ratings are given below The symbols are described below the table Type Input Output Frame ACS350 hin bn l2 1min 10min l2max Py a x E U 1 A A A A kW HP 1 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 01x 02A4 2 6 1 2 4 3 6 4 2 0 37 0 5 RO 01x 04A7 2 11 4 4 7 7 1 8 2 0 75 1 R1 01x 06A7 2 16 1 6 7 10 1 11 7 1 1 1 5 R1 01x 07A5 2 16 8 7 5 11 3 13 1 1 5 2 R2 01x 09A8 2 21 0 9 8 14 7 17 2 2 2 3 R2 3 phase Uy 200
229. ed digital input DI1 INV O active 1 inactive 5 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 Actual signals and parameters 232 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI1 INV See selection DI1 INV 1 NOT SEL No reset signal 0 DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 STATE 1 Reset during state transition to state 1 Counter is reset when the state has 6 been reached STATE 2 Reset during state transition to state 2 Counter is reset when the state has 7 been reached STATE 3 Reset during state transition to state 3 Counter is reset when the state has 8 been reached STATE 4 Reset during state transition to state 4 Counter is reset when the state has 9 been reached STATE 5 Reset during state transition to state 5 Counter is reset when the state has 10 been reached STATE 6 Reset during state transition to state 6 Counter is reset when the state has 11 been reached STATE 7 Reset during state transition to state 7 Counter is reset when the state has 12 been reached STATE 8 Reset during state transition to state 8 Counter is reset when the state has 13 been reached SEQ PROG RST R
230. efined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 O Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 O O Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 Actual signals and parameters 166 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI2 3 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 8 DI3 4 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 9 DI4 5 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 10 DI1 2 3 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 DI2 and DI3 1 12 DI active 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 DI3 Operation 1 1 1 No constant speed 011 1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 011 0 Speed defined by parameter 1206 CONST SPEED 5 1 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 O Speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 DI3 4 5 INV See selection DI1 2 3 INV 13 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 1 Eur 5 US 6 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 2 Eur 10 US 12 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output fr
231. egister 400xx After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set the Drive control parameters on page 246 must be checked and adjusted when necessary The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 246 Drive control parameters After the modbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the modbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus control address CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU 1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 START 40031 COMMANDS STOP when EXT1 is selected as the active control bits 0 1 location 1002 EXT2 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 START 40031 COMMANDS STOP when EXT2 is selected as the active control bits 0 1 location 1003 FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as defined by 40031 DIRECTION REVERSE parameters 1001 and 1002 The direction control is bit 2 REQUEST explained in section Reference handling on p
232. eived by the drive 53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the address of the device 1 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link 39242 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit s and the data length 8 NONE 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile ABB DRV LIM 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES _ Number of valid messages received by the drive 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check 0 error received by the drive 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 0 5311 EFB PAR 11 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40006 0 5312 EFB PAR 12 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40007 0 5313 EFB PAR 13 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40008 0 5314 EFB PAR 14 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 400090 5315 EFB PAR 15 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40010 0 5316 EFB PAR 16 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 400110 5317 EFB PAR 17 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 400120 5318 EFB PAR 18 Reserved 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control 0x0000 Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status 0x0000 Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word
233. eldbus or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual programmable fault Check fault function parameter settings function 3018 Check connections 3019 Check if master can communicate 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal has Check fault function parameter settings 8110 fallen below limit defined by Check for proper analog control signal levels F parameter 3027 Al1 FAULT 0308 bit 5 LIMIT Check connections programmable fault function 3001 3021 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal has Check fault function parameter settings 8110 fallen below limit defined by Check for proper analog control signal levels a parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT 0308 bit 6 LIMIT Check connections programmable fault function 3001 3022 2008 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected as Check panel connection 5300 i ahi eae e for Check fault function parameters 0308 bit 7 dio Check control panel connector programmable fault function 3002 communicating Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references via control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings Fault tracing 275 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions See also section Derating on OVERTEMP excessive Alarm limit is page 291 4210 120 C Check air f
234. elected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel in 105 display mode 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par 3415 DIRECT SIGNAL3 PARAM 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by 7 parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Actual signals and parameters 154 Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by S parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement 3501 SENSOR TYPE Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE selects the sensor type 3502 INPUT SELECTION Selects the source
235. electing the resistor 150000 ton Eq 1 Uy 200 240 V R 5 PRmax Rmax Un 380 415 V R a _ en N l PRmax a lo 615000 Un 415 480 V R PRmax Eq 2 Erpulse Prmax fon t Eq 3 Prave Prmax 7 For conversion use 1 HP 746 W where R selected brake resistor value ohm PRmax maximum power during the braking cycle W PRave average power during the braking cycle W ERpulse energy conducted into the resistor during a single braking pulse J loi length of the braking pulse s T length of the braking cycle s Technical data 303 Type Rmin Rmax PBRmax ACS350 ohm ohm kW HP 1 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 01x 02A4 2 70 390 0 37 0 5 01x 04A7 2 40 200 0 75 1 01x 06A7 2 40 130 1 1 1 5 01x 07A5 2 30 100 1 5 2 01x 09A8 2 30 70 2 2 3 3 phase Uy 200 240 V 200 208 220 230 240 V 03x 02A4 2 70 390 0 37 0 5 03x 03A5 2 70 260 0 55 0 75 03x 04A7 2 40 200 0 75 1 03x 06A7 2 40 130 1 1 1 5 03x 07A5 2 30 100 1 5 2 03x 09A8 2 30 70 2 2 3 03x 13A3 2 30 50 3 0 3 03x 17A6 2 30 40 4 0 5 03x 24A4 2 18 25 5 5 7 5 03x 31A0 2 7 19 7 5 10 03x 46A2 2 7 13 11 0 15 3 phase Uy 380 480 V 380 400 415 440 460 480 V 03x 01A2 4 200 1180 0 37 0 5 03x 01A9 4 175 800 0 55 0 75 03x 02A4 4 165 590 0 75 1 03x 03A3 4 150 400 1 1 1
236. en or short circuited 0021 CURR MEAS Drive internal fault Current Contact your local ABB representative 2211 measurement is out of range 0306 bit 4 0022 SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check input power line fuses 3130 is o as E ages Check for input power supply imbalance 0306 bit 5 hee power Ne a Check fault function parameters programmable Tri p occurs when DC voltage fault function 3076 ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage 0023 ENCODER ERR Communication fault between Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder 7301 pulse encoder and pulse interface module and its wiring and parameter group encoder interface module or 50 ENCODER settings 0306 bit 6 between module and drive programmable fault function 5003 0024 OVERSPEED Motor is turning faster than Check minimum maximum speed settings 7310 highest np speed to Check adequacy of motor braking torque incorrectly set minimum Se a 0306 bit 7 maximum speed insufficient Check applicability of torque control braking torque or changes in Check need for brake chopper and resistor s load when using torque reference Operating range limits are set by parameters 2001 MINIMUM SPEED and 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED with vector control or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ with scalar control 0026 DRIVE ID Internal drive ID fault Contact your local ABB representative 5400 0306 bit 9 0027 CONFIG FILE Internal configura
237. ensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 VAC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals Program features A 125 It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between the 24 VDC voltage supply offered by the drive and digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor relay i DIS 24 VDC WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 VAC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input Settings Parameter Additional information 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Analog input settings 15 ANALOGUE
238. eously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs Settings Parameter Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control panel Diagnostics Actual value Additional information Group 07 OPERATING DATA Lists of actual signals 04 FAULT HISTORY Motor identification The performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined during the motor start up A motor Identification Magnetisation is automatically done the first time the start command is given During this first start up the motor is magnetised at zero speed for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created This identification method is suitable for most applications In demanding applications a separate Identification Run ID run can be performed Settings Parameter 9970 ID RUN Program features 107 Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilising the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the dr
239. ep delay 4024 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode The motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm message PID SLEEP Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to INTERNAL PID output level t lt 4024 lt t gt 4024 lt gt 4023 al PID process feedback A PID reference Yy ates 4025 a t StoP Start 0 0 500 0 Hz Sleep start level 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm Actual signals and parameters 220 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY Defines the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 4023 PID 60 SLEEP LEVEL When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter is reset 0 0 3600 0 s Sleep start delay 1 0 1s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function The drive wakes up if O the process actual value deviation from the PID reference value exceeds the set wake up deviation 4025 longer than the wake up delay 4026 Wake up level depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings If parameter 4005 is set 0 Wake up level PID reference 4010 Wake up deviation 4025 If parameter 4005 is set to 1 Wake up level PID reference 4010 Wake up deviation 4025 Se is Wake up level when 4005 1 4025 PID reference 4025 er a AAA Wake u
240. equency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1204 CONST SPEED 3 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 3 Eur 15 US 18 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1205 CONST SPEED 4 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 4 Eur 20 US 24 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1206 CONST SPEED 5 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 5 Eur 25 US 30 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm 1207 CONST SPEED 6 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 6 Eur 40 US 48 0 0 500 0 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Constant speed 6 is used also as jogging 1 rpm speed See section Jogging on page 129 1208 CONST SPEED 7 Defines constant speed or drive output frequency 7 Constant speed 7 is Eur 50 US used also as jogging speed see section Jogging on page 129 or with fault 60 functions 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 0 500 Hz Speed in rpm Output frequency in Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm MODE sett
241. er 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and deceleration Motor speed ramps are available It is possible to adjust the acceleration deceleration times and the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled via a digital input or fieldbus Linear S curve The available ramp shape alternatives are Linear and S curve Linear Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration deceleration 2 t s S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Sequence programming offers eight additional ramp times See section Sequence programming on page 133 Critical Speeds A Critical Speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed bands because of e g mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical speeds or speed bands Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Program features 111 Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if e torque control is active or PID reference is being followed or e drive is in local control mode This function oper
242. escription Def FbEq DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the torque limit 1 2 selection i e control 7 word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 15 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Maximum torque limit 1 is defined by parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and maximum torque limit 2 is defined by parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 parameter 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 value 1 0 parameter 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 value DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive See parameter 2013 MIN 300 TORQUE SEL 600 0 0 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive See parameter 2013 MIN 300 TORQUE SEL 600 0 0 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive See parameter 2014 MAX 300 TORQUE SEL 0 0 600 0 Value in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive See par
243. eset signal source defined by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG RESET 14 8420 ST1 REF SEL Selects the source for the sequence programming state 1 reference 0 Parameter is used when parameter 1103 1106 REF1 2 SELECT is set to SEQ PROG Al1 SEQ PROG Al2 SEQ PROG Note Constant speeds in group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS overwrite the selected sequence programming reference COMM 0136 COMM VALUE 2 For scaling see Fieldbus reference scaling on 1 3 page 253 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 1 2 REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 1 1 REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 1 0 REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 0 9 REF Al1 Al2 50 DI4U 5D Digital input 4 Reference increase Digital input DI5 Reference decrease 0 8 DI3U 4D Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 0 7 DI3U 4DR Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 0 6 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 233 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq Al2 JOY Analog input Al2 as joystick The minimum input signal runs the motor at the 0 5 maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the
244. esistor if used DC overvoltage control must be deactivated when brake chopper and resistor is used Check deceleration time 2203 2206 Retrofit frequency converter with brake chopper and brake resistor 0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions See also section Derating 4210 excessive Fault trip limit is on page 291 0305 bit 2 135 C Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against unit power 0004 SHORT CIRC Short circuit in motor cable s or Check motor and motor cable 2340 motor 0305 bit 3 0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check that undervoltage controller is on parameter 3220 is not sufficient due to missing 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0305 bit 5 input power line phase blown Check input power supply and fuses fuse rectifier bridge internal fault or too low input power 0007 Al LOSS Analog input Al1 signal has Check fault function parameter settings 8110 fallen below limit defined by Check for proper analog control signal levels parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT 0305 bit 6 LIMIT Check connections programmable fault function 3001 3021 0008 Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal has Check fault function parameter settings 8110 fallen below limit defined by Check for proper analog control signal levels parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT 0305 bit 7 LIMIT Check connections programmable fault function 3001 3022 Fault tracing 279
245. espond to the 1301 MINIMUM Al1 and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows REF Hz rpm REF1 MAX 1105 REF1MN 1104 1302 1301 Alt signal REFA MIN 1301 1302 A 1104 l I i REF1 MAX _ l 1105 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 Corresponds to the Eur 50 maximum setting of the used source signal US 60 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximum value in rpm Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm is SCALAR FREQ See example in parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 Al2 KEYPAD See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 Al See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 Al2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 2 Al1 JOYST See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 3 Al2 JOYST See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 4 DI3U 4D R See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 5 DI3U 4D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 6 Actual signals and parameters 164 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq COMM See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM AI1 See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 9 COMM AI1 See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 10 DI3U 4D RNC See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 11 DI3U 4D NC See parameter 1703 REF1 SELECT 12 Al1 AI2 See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 14 Al1 AI2 See parameter 7703 REF1 SELECT 15 Al1 Al2 See parameter
246. ess Y The display PA r shows the number of one of the parameter groups MENU FWD O1 PAR FWD 3 Use keys aS and w_7 to find the desired parameter group LOC 1 1 PAR FWD 4 Press Y The display shows one of the parameters in the selected LOC group PAR FWD 5 Use keys lt A and SY 7 to find the desired parameter LOC 1 1 0 3 PAR FWD 6 Press and hold 537 for about two seconds until the display shows the LOC value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible PAR FWD Note When is visible pressing keys Ay and SY simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter 7 Use keys a and S w_7 to select the parameter value When you have LOC changed the parameter value starts flashing PAR FWD e To save the displayed parameter value press SY LOC e To cancel the new value and keep the original press 777 ae Control panels 64 How to select the monitored signals Step Action Display You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 63 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the def
247. ete descriptions 189 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero i e control 7 word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 262 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 258 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 0 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will 1 ramp to zero according to the used ramp time DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 23 SPEED CONTROL Speed controller variables See section Speed controller tuning on page 115 2301 PROP GAIN Defines a relative gain for the speed controller Great gain may cause speed 10 oscillation The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain Kp 1 9 A T Integration time 0 Error v lu Tp Derivation time 0 Controller Controller output output ge e Error value Kp i gt Note For automatic setting of the gain use autotune run parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE
248. eter sets are information are same See parameters in group incompatible 33 INFORMATION 5088 Operation has failed because of drive memory Contact your local ABB representative error 5089 Download has failed because of CRC error Contact your local ABB representative 5090 Download has failed because of data processing Contact your local ABB representative error 5091 Operation has failed because of parameter error Contact your local ABB representative 5092 Parameter download from source to destination Check that source and destination drive drive has failed because parameter sets are incompatible information are same See parameters in group 33 INFORMATION Fault tracing 278 Fault messages generated by the drive CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has exceeded Check motor load i eck acceleration time an 2310 trip level Check accel 2202 and 2205 0305 bit O Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 291 0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive intermediate circuit Check that overvoltage controller is on parameter 3210 DC voltage DC overvoltage trip 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0305 bit 1 limit is 420 V for 200 V drives Check input power line for static or transient and 840 V for 400 V drives overvoltage Check brake chopper and r
249. ex Name Selection Description Def FbEq ENABLED Counter enabled 6 1905 COUNTER LIMIT Defines the counter limit 1000 0 65535 Limit value 1 1 1906 COUNTER INPUT Selects the input signal source for the counter PLS IN DI5 PLS IN DI 5 Digital input DI5 pulses When a pulse is detected the counter value 1 increases by 1 ENC W O DIR Encoder pulse edges When a rising or a falling edge is detected the counter 2 value increases by 1 ENC WITH DIR Encoder pulse edges The direction of rotation is taken into account When 3 a rising or a falling edge is detected and the direction of rotation is forward the counter value increases by 1 When the direction of rotation is reverse the counter value decreases by 1 FILTERED DI5 Filtered digital input DI5 pulses When a pulse is detected the counter value 4 increases by 1 Note Due to filtering the maximum input signal frequency is 50 Hz 1907 COUNTER RESET Selects the source for the counter reset signal NOT SEL DI1 INV Counter reset through inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No reset signal 0 DI1 Counter reset through digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 AT LIMIT Reset at the limit defined by parameter 1905 COU
250. f FAULT is selected the drive may generate an UNDERLOAD fault during ID run ALARM The drive generates alarm UNDERLOAD 2 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME Defines the time limit for the underload function See parameter 3013 20 UNDERLOAD FUNC 10 400 s Time limit 1 1s Actual signals and parameters 200 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE Selects the load curve for the underload function See parameter 3013 1 UNDERLOAD FUNC Tm nominal torque of the motor Ty fn nominal frequency of the motor 9907 A Underload curve types 80 E Y 70 60 7 50 40 4 pra 30 20 a f 0 fn 2 4 fy 1 9 Number of the load curve 1 3016 SUPPLY PHASE Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss i e when DC voltage FAULT ripple is excessive FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE and the motor coasts to a stop when 0 the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage LIMIT ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS is generated 1 when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm and the output current limitation The current is limited until the ripple drops under the minimum limit 0 3 Ipa ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS when the DC ripple 2 exceeds 14 of the nominal DC volt
251. features 120 PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive e Process PID PID1 and External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level Process controller PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used e g when the load of the motor changes considerably in time External Trim controller PID2 PID2 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways e External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output via drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve e Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fin
252. ference selection and correction on page 249 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section 10 Reference selection and correction on page 249 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 11 Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM DI3U 4D NC Digital input 3 Reference increase Digital input Dl4 Reference decrease 12 The program stores the active reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 14 REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 15 REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 16 REF Al1 50 Al2 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 17 REF Al1 50 Al2 INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 19 DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC 31 FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 217 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq SEQ
253. figure in 80 parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Note If parameter 2605 U F RATIO Is set to USER DEFINED this parameter is not active The IR compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER DEFINED U1 0 100 Value in percent of the motor frequency 1 1 2605 U F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field weakening point LINEAR LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications 1 SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications With squared U f 2 ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies USER DEFINED Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610 2618 See section Custom U f 3 ratio on page112 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Defines the switching frequency of the drive Higher switching frequency 4 results in lower acoustic noise See also parameter 2607 SWITC FREQ CTRL and Switching frequency derating on page 291 4 kHz Can be used with scalar and vector control The control mode is selected by 1 1 kHz parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 8 kHz Can be used with scalar and vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 12 kHz Can be used with scalar and vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 16 kHz Can be used only with scalar control i e when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ Actual signals and parameters 194 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 2607 S
254. fined trigger point Settings Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Program features 108 DC Hold By activating the motor DC Hold feature it is possible to lock the rotor at zero speed When both the reference and the motor speed fall below the preset DC hold speed the drive stops the motor and starts to inject DC into the motor When the reference speed again exceeds the DC hold speed the normal drive operation resumes Speed Settings Parameters 2104 2106 Speed compensated stop Speed compensation stop is available e g for applications where a conveyer needs to travel a certain distance after receiving the Max speed stop command At maximum speed the motor is stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp Below maximum speed Used speed stop is delayed by running the drive at current speed before the motor is ramped to a stop As shown in the following figure the distance travelled after the stop command is the same in both cases e area A equals area B Speed A Stop command area A area B Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction Settings Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION Flux Braking The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in the motor By increasing the motor flux the energy generated by the motor during braking can be converted to motor thermal energy Motor Tg speed Tp 0
255. for the motor temperature measurement Alt signal 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement 0 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement O 3505 AO EXCITATION Enables current feed from analog output AO DISABLE 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 0 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1 0 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1 MONDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1 MONDAY 3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3610 START TIME 3 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3611 STOP TIME 3 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 3612 START DAY 3 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3613 STOP DAY 3 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3614 START TIME 4 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1 3615 STOP TIME 4 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1 3616 START DAY 4 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 3617 STOP DAY 4 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated after the 0 booster activation signal is switched off
256. function 0 5 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that SET1 selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Process PID PID1 control parameter set 2 4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4102 INTEGRATION TIME See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 4103 DERIVATION TIME See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME 4104 PID DERIV FILTER See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 4105 ERROR VALUE INV See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS 4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 4108 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4109 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4110 SET POINT SEL See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 4112 SETPOINT MIN See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN 4113 SETPOINT MAX See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4117 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP SELECTION See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY See parameter 4024 PID SLEE
257. g output control is frozen to the previously set value AO 0 Analog output value is set to zero Relay and transistor outputs are frozen to 0 0 the previously set value 0 1 100 0 Value written to signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL Value can be connected to control analog output AO by setting parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL value to 170 i e signal 0170 SEQ PROG AO VAL AO value is frozen to this value until it is zeroed 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY Defines the delay time for state 1 When delay has elapsed state transition is 0 allowed See parameters 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 and 8426 ST1 TRIG TO STN 0 0 6553 5 s Delay time 1 0 1s 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the state from state 1 NOT SEL to state 2 Note State change to state N 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N has a higher priority than state change to the next state 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 DI5 INV Trigger through inverted digital input DI5 O active 1 inactive 5 DI4 INV See selection DI5 INV 4 DI3 INV See selection DI5 INV 3 DI2 INV See selection DI5 INV 2 DI1 INV See selection DI5 INV 1 NOT SEL No trigger signal If parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N setting is also NOT O SEL the state is frozen and can be reset only with parameter 8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Trigger through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 Al 1 LOW 1 St
258. gital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 DI 7 active 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 User Parameter Set 0 O User Parameter Set 1 1 O User Parameter Set 2 0 1 User Parameter Set 3 DI2 3 See selection DI1 2 8 Actual signals and parameters 173 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI3 4 See selection DI1 2 9 DI4 5 See selection DI1 2 10 DI1 INV User Parameter Set control through inverted digital input DI1 Falling edge of 1 inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 2 is loaded into use Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 User Parameter Set 1 is loaded into use DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 DI1 2 INV User Parameter Set selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 7 Dl inactive O D active DI1 DI2 User Parameter Set 1 1 User Parameter Set 1 O 1 User Parameter Set 2 1 O User Parameter Set 3 DI2 3 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 8 DI3 4 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 9 DI4 5 INV See selection DI1 2 INV 10 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source for the local NOT SEL control mode lock signal When local lock is active entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel NOT SEL Local control is allowed
259. gnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting to a rotating machine Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetisation is used see selection DC MAGN SCAN BOOST Combines scanning start starting to a rotating machine and torque boost See selections SCANSTART and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function COAST COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply The motor coasts to a stop RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Actual signals and parameters 184 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection SPEED COMP Description Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Speed compensated stop on page 108 Def FbEq 3 SPD COMP FWD Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if the direction of rotation is forward Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the d
260. hapter Fault tracing An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit O Reserved Bit 1 PID SLEEP Bit 2 ID RUN Actual signals and parameters Actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 START ENABLE 1 MISSING Bit 5 START ENABLE 2 MISSING Bit 6 EMERGENCY STOP Bit 7 ENCODER ERROR Bit 8 FIRST START Bit 9 INPUT PHASE LOSS Bit 10 15 Reserved 147 FbEq 04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history read only 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault See chapter Fault tracing for the codes 0 Fault history is clear on panel display NO RECORD 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred Format on the assistant panel Real time hh mm ss if the real time clock is operating Time elapsed after the power on hh mm ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the basic panel Time elapsed after power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 040
261. he motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do nat control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys lt lt gt gt and O gt or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel press the LOC REM key and then the stop key Q gt Safety Safety Table of contents AGS350 drive Manuals iii A A dt AA eer dee Gade a 2 Safety What this chapter contains ooccccco eee 5 Use of warming SYMbolS jis Nard ass eh es Red S
262. her than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen AFP 2 Al1 Motor speed reference Speed 0 10 V 4 10 konm J 7 s 3 GND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA OF at 5 Al2 Motor torque reference Torque 4 20 mA 4 E 6 GND Analog input circuit common max 500 ohm 97 fT 7 JAO Motor speed value 0 20 mA E Y 3 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI Stop 0 Start 1 Speed 13 DI2 Forward 0 Reverse 1 14 DI3 Speed 0 Torque 1 control selection 15 DI4 Constant speed 1 parameter 7202 ea 16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 19 RONO el 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA Q 21 DOOUT Aey No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 Speed control Changes rotation direction Torque control Changes torque direction 20 ramp times according to parameters 2202 and 2203 1 ramp times according to parameters 2205 and 2206 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp 4 The signal source mus
263. here no one two or three constant speeds are used The drive is started and stopped with push buttons Alternate Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used The speed is Potentiometer controlled by two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchanged Hand Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved to one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use PID Control Process control applications e g different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control Torque Torque control applications It is possible to switch between torque and speed Control control Some control signal terminals are reserved to torque control others for speed control One digital input selects between torque and speed control User The user can save the customised standard macro e the parameter settings including group 99 START UP D
264. i 41 CANCEL 00 00 OK Control panels 80 Step Action To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press SI Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys amp and S Y 7 and press lt Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press To cancel your changes press de To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight SEL saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press wil Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed e To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press Sy e To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press SS e To return to the previous display without making changes press EP Display LOC USET DATE 1K 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 EU US Australial NSW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC HELP EU On Mar last Sunday off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels 81 Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to ma
265. ibit 5044 Parameter backup file restoring error Check that file is compatible with drive 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative 5052 Parameter upload has failed Retry parameter upload 5060 Parameter download aborted Retry parameter download 5062 Parameter download has failed Retry parameter download 5070 Panel backup memory write error Contact your local ABB representative 5071 Panel backup memory read error Contact your local ABB representative 5080 Operation is not allowed because drive is not in Switch to local control mode local control mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because of active fault Check cause of fault and reset fault 5082 Operation is not allowed because override mode is enabled 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK on setting 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is Wait until task is completed and retry performing task 5085 Parameter download from source to destination Check that source and destination drive types drive has failed are same i e ACS350 See drive type designation label 5086 Parameter download from source to destination Check that source and destination drive type drive has failed codes are same See drive type designation label 5087 Parameter download from source to destination Check that source and destination drive drive has failed because param
266. ible options fieldbus potentiometer encoder all with instructions Basic Control Panel or Assistant Control Panel Mechanical installation 26 Delivery check Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ACS350 03E 08A8 4 IP20 UL Open type 2 DON 4 kW 5 HP S N YWWRXXXX AURDIIINIIONIIIO TENET 68468167 U1 _ 3 380 480 V 11 3 13 6 A f1 48 63 Hz U2 3 0 U1V 12 8 8 A 150 1 10 min f2 0 500 Hz Type designation label Before installation Type code see section Type code on page 23 Degree of protection IP and UL NEMA Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 290 Bl ow N gt Serial number of format YWWRXXXXWS where Ye 5 9 A for 2005 2009 2010 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 ABB MRP code of the drive CE marking and C Tick C UL US and RoHS marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings The ACS350 may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enc
267. ime periods 1 2 3 and 4 31 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Process PID PID1 control parameter set 1 See section PID control on page 120 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller Great gain may cause speed 1 oscillation 0 1 100 0 Gain When value is set to 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth 1 0 1 as much as the error value When value is set to 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value 4002 INTEGRATION TIME Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller The integration 60 time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable A 4 A Error B 4 B Error value step _ C Controller output with gain 1 D 4001 10 D Controller output with gain 10 C 4001 1 _ t jt 4002 0 0 3600 0 s Integration time If parameter value is set to zero integration l part of the 1 0 1s PID controller is disabled Actual signals and parameters P
268. in local control press lt gt Control panels 72 Output mode In the Output mode you can monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 07 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation e set the speed frequency or torque reference e adjust the display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing EP repeatedly Loc 5 QHZ HZ INN 50 On oo ooo q A 24 4 The top right corner of the Loc display shows the reference 49 1 Hz value The center can be A configured to show up to three 10 7 signal values or bar graphs see DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 00 00 MENU page 75 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Step Action Display f If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly until you get there REM amp 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC U control by pressing E The display briefly shows a message about changing 49 P 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 a 5 A 10 7 O DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse J shown on the status line or vice versa p
269. indoor controlled environment Operation installed for stationary use Storage in the protective package Transportation in the protective package Installation site altitude 0 to 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 291 Air temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F No frost allowed See section Derating on page 291 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Relative humidity 0 to 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases Contamination levels IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 2 IEC 60721 3 1 No conductive dust allowed According to IEC 60721 3 3 chemical gases Class 3C2 solid particles Class 382 The ACS350 must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust According to IEC 60721 3 1 chemical gases Class 1C2 solid particles Class 1S2 According to IEC 60721 3 2 chemical gases Class 2C2 solid particles Class 2S2 Sinusoidal vibration IEC 60721 3 3 Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock IEC 60068 2 27 ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A Max 100 m s 330 ft s 11 ms According to IS
270. ing is SCALAR FREQ Constant speed 7 is used also as jogging 1 rpm speed See section Jogging on page 129 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Description Selects timed function activated speed into use when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUN182 167 Def FbEq CS1 2 3 4 EXT CS1 2 3 External speed reference or constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 0 0 External reference 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 CS1 2 3 4 Constant speed selection with TIMED FUNC 1 and TIMED FUNC 2 1 timed function active O timed function inactive TIMED TIMED Operation FUNC 1 FUNC 2 0 0 Speed defined by parameter 7202 CONST SPEED 1 1 0 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS Analog input signal processing 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference minimum setting
271. is reset from any other source e g digital input Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 262 DCU communication profile Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits two different signals are needed for both the control 0301 and 0302 and status 0303 and 0304 words The following tables describe the Control Word content for the DCU profile DCU Profile Control Word parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Information 0 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter 2102 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 No operation 1 START 1 Start Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 No operation 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction The direction is defined by using the XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 sign of the reference values 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Enter local control mode 0 Enter external control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset other No operation 5 EXT2 1 Switch to external control EXT2 0 Switch to external control EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Activate Run Disable 0 Activate Run Enable 7 STPMODE_R 1 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp bit 10 Bit O value must be 1 STOP 0 No operation 8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency stop Bit 0 value must be 1 STOP 0 No operation
272. is active See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE control mode changes from local to remote external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or from EXT2 to EXT1 OFF Disabled 0 ON Enabled 1 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Selects the source for the external emergency stop command NOT SEL The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop command is reset Note The installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected DI1 Digital input DI1 1 stop along the emergency stop ramp See parameter 1 2208 EMER DEC TIME 0 emergency stop command reset DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI 0 stop along the emergency stop ramp See 1 parameter 2208 EMER DEC TIME 1 emergency stop command reset DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 100 2101 START FUNCTION 15 300 Value in percent 1 1 2111 STOP SIGNAL DLY Defines the stop signal delay time when parameter 2702 STOP FUNCTION 0 is set to SPEED COMP 0 10000 ms Delay time 1
273. is setto COUNTER START COUNTER STOP DI1 INV Start stop command through inverted digital input D11 1 When par 1007 value is COUNTER STOP 0 start Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded When par 1001 value is COUNTER START 0 stop Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has been exceeded DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL Not start stop command source 0 DI1 Start stop command through digital input D11 1 When par 1007 value is COUNTER STOP 1 start Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has been exceeded When par 1001 value is COUNTER START 1 stop Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 has been exceeded DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 ACTIVATE External start stop command e g through fieldbus 6 Actual signals and parameters 180 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits Speed values are used with vector control and frequency values are used with scalar control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 2001 MINIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed minimum speed
274. it 2 1 state change 72 COMM VAL1 3 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 3 1 state change 73 COMM VAL1 4 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 4 1 state change 74 COMM VAL1 5 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 5 1 state change 75 COMM VAL1 6 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 6 1 state change 76 COMM VAL1 7 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 7 1 state change 77 Al2H2DI45V10 State change according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 when Al2 78 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and DI4 is active AI2H2DI5SV10 State change according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 when Al2 79 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value and DI5 is active 8426 ST1 TRIG TO STN Selects the source for the trigger signal which changes the state from state 1 NOT SEL to state N State N is defined with parameter 8427 ST1 STATE N Note State change to state N 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N has a higher priority than state change to the next state 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 See parameter 8425 ST1 TRIG TO ST 2 8427 ST1 STATEN Defines the state N See parameter 8426 ST1 TRIG TO ST N STATE 1 STATE 1 State 1 1 STATE 2 State 2 2 STATE 3 State 3 3 STATE 4 State 4 4 STATE 5 State 5 5 STATE 6 State 6 6 STATE 7 State 7 7 STATE 8 State 8 8 8430 ST2 REF SEL See parameters 8420 8427 8497 ST8 STATEN 98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation 9802 COMM PROT SEL Activates the external serial communication and selects the interface
275. ive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed Vinput power TM fout Upc N m Hz Vdc Uno 160 80 520 C Sa 120 60 390 f 80 40 260 Tm 40 20 130 0 0 0 t s E 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout output frequency of the drive Tm Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fout 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL DC Magnetising When DC Magnetising is activated the drive automatically magnetises the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible breakaway torque up to 180 of motor nominal torque By adjusting the premagnetising time it is possible to synchronise the motor start and e g a mechanical brake release The Automatic Start feature and DC Magnetising cannot be activated at the same time Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when e g drive power consumption has exceeded the de
276. ive areas 1a Loc 1 1 to REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus 1d ouTPUT b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu EWE Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Sag Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list e Increases a value if a parameter is selected e Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down e Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected e Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR
277. ive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and BRK and BRK WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling Safety Operation and start up A These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that t
278. k signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk 1 Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections NO UNIT Mrev 0 63 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for the display parameter selected by 1 parameter 4006 UNITS 0 3 Example PI 3 14159 1 1 4007 value Entry Display 0 0003 3 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Actual signals and parameters 216 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling applied to 0 the PID controller s actual values Units 4006 Scale 4007 1000 4009 4008 Internal scale i gt a7 0 100 1000 X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the scaling applied to the 100 PID controller s actual values XX Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4010 SET POINT SEL Selects the source for the process PID controller reference signal Al1 KEYPAD Control panel 0 Al1 Analog input Al1 1 Al2 Analog input Al2 2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 8 COMM Al1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section 9 Re
279. ke a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to three user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes e g the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION Th
280. l1LO2 ORDI5 State change when Al1 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value or when 20 DI5 is active AI2HI2 ORDI5 State change when Al2 value gt par 8473 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value or when 21 DI5 is active TIMED FUNC 1 Trigger with time function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 22 TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 23 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 24 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 25 CHANGE DLY State change after delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY 26 has elapsed DI1 OR DELAY State change after DI1 activation or after delay time defined by parameter 27 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed DI2 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY 28 DI3 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY 29 DI4 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY 30 DI5 OR DELAY See selection DI1 OR DELAY 31 AI1HI1 ORDLY State change when Al1 value gt par 8477 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value or after 32 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed AI2LO1 ORDLY State change when Al1 value lt par 8472 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value or after 33 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed AI1HI2 ORDLY State change when Al1 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value or after 34 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed AI2LO2 ORDLY State change when Al2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value or after 35 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed SUPRV1 OVER Logic val
281. ler of ACT1 and ACT2 6 MAX ACT1 2 Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7 sqrt ACT 1 2 Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8 sqA1 sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of ACT2 9 sqrt ACT1 Square root of ACT1 10 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0758 PID COMM VALUE 1 value 11 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0759 PID COMM VALUE 2 value 12 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL 0 Parameter is used mainly in applications where feedback value is calculated from a other variable e g flow from pressure difference 32 768 32 767 Multiplier If parameter value is set to zero no multiplier is used 1 0 001 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 Al2 ACT1 MINIMUM Al Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 1 Actual signals and parameters 218 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq Al2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 2 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 3 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 4 POWER Uses power for ACT1 5 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 6 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0759 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7 FREQ INPUT Frequency input 8 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 Al2 MINIMUM See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4018
282. leration time 1 i e the time required for the speed to change 5 from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ with scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED with vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 0 0 1800 0 s Time 1 01s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 i e the time required for the speed to change 5 from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREA with scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED with vector control to zero The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If a short dece
283. leration time is needed for a high inertia application the drive should be equipped with a brake resistor Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 0 0 1800 0 s Time 1 01s Actual signals and parameters 188 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Description Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop and jogging Def FbEq 0 0 0 1000 0 s 0 00 s Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps 0 01 1000 00 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 Speed Linear ramp Par 2204 0 s S curve rdmp Par 2204 gt 0s Max lt gt t Par 2202 Par 2204 1 0 1s 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Defines the acceleration time 2 i e the time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ with scalar control 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED with vector control The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
284. ll be used in the application SAVING A USER MACRO AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at Loc 9 9 O 2 this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user macro as instructed in section PAR EWD User macros on page 94 Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run How to perform the guided start up 51 To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY A procedure The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist Check that the starting
285. losure requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data The drive can be mounted in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 c DIN rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimensions for frame details Requirements for the installation site See chapter Technical data for the allowed operation conditions of the drive The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so they can be mounted side by side Mechanical installation 27 Mounting the drive Mount the drive Note Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the locations for the holes using e g the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimensions The number and location of the holes used depend on how the drive is mounted a back mounti
286. low and fan operation 0308 bit 8 Check motor power against unit power 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is too Check motor ratings load and cooling 4310 high or appears to be too Check start up data 4 high due to excessive 0305 bit 9 load insufficient motor Check fault function parameters programmable fault power inadequate cooling function or incorrect start up data 3005 3009 3503 Measured motor Check value of alarm limit temperature has exceeded Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value alarm limit ae cana set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE a Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low dueto Check for problem in driven equipment FF6A ee release mechanism in Check fault function parameters 0308 bit 10 iven equipmierit Check motor power against unit power programmable fault function 3013 3015 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 region due to e g Check fault function parameters 0308 bit 11 excessive load or insufficient motor power programmable fault function 3010 3012 2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET settings 0308 bit 12 2018 PID SLEEP Sleep function has entered See parameter groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 0309 bit 1 sleeping mode 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 2019 ID RUN Motor Identification Run i
287. lt limit Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 211 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3505 AO EXCITATION Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter setting overrides DISABLE parameter group 75 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA DISABLE Disabled 0 ENABLE Enabled 1 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal See section Timed functions on page 131 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Timed function is not selected 0 DI1 Digital input DI Timed function enable by a rising edge of DI1 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 ACTIVE Timed function is always enabled 7 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 Timed function enable by a falling edge of DI1 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 The time can be changed in 2 second steps 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 59 58 hours minutes seconds Example If parameter value is set to 07 00 00 the timed function is activated at 7 00 7 a m 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the
288. lue is compared 0 to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT value 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 1 Mrev disabled 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter When parameter 0 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 1 Mrev 2905 RUNTIME TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter Value is compared to 0 parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is disabled 1 0 1 kh 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter When parameter 2905 0 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 0 1 kh Actual signals and parameters 196 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 2907 USER MWh TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption counter Value is 0 compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh ACT v
289. me Selection Description Def FbEq FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO 1 1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO FAULT 1 See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO 0 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time 1 0 1s 1807 DO OFF DELAY Defines the release delay for digital output DO 0 0 0 3600 0 s Delay time 1 0 1s 1808 FO CONTENT SEL Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output FO 104 X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1809 FO CONTENT MIN Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows FO 1812 1812 1811 1811 i FO content FO content gt gt 1809 1810 1809 1810 X X Setting range depends on parameter 7808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1810 FO CONTENT MAX Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 10 10 16000 Hz Minimum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN 1 1 Hz 1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 10 16000 Hz Maximum frequen
290. me is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering QUT 1103 1106 External reference REF 1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0161 Frequency input value Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as digital output or frequency output 0 16000 Hz The update time for the transistor frequency output is 2 ms Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN Transistor output settings OUT 8423 Transistor output control in sequence programming Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0163 Transistor output status 0164 Transistor output frequency Program features 106 Actual signals Several actual signals are available Drive output frequency current voltage and power e Motor speed and torque e Intermediate circuit DC voltage e Active control location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 e Reference values Drive temperature e Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital I O and analog I O status PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultan
291. meter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2707 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYSTART or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is O OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON should be selected if the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 54 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 49 Start up control with I O and ID Run IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 OFF Press key 2 to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press lt lt gt gt to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation e If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 To go to the Main menu press 7 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys a v_ until you see rEF and press 7 Increase the frequency reference
292. minal X3 The maximum length of the communication cable with RS 232 is restricted to 3 meters For more information on the FMBA Modbus Adapter module see FMBA 01 Modbus Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE68586704 English RS 232 is designed for a point to point application a single master controlling one slave RS 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 244 Fieldbus controller Fieldbus ACS350 f devices RH PA RS 232 panel connector Embedded fieldbus modbus connection is either RS 232 or RS 485 i x3 FMBAModbus RS 485 i Adapter X1 Data flow Ks bel lt a WYControl Word CW E lt a References PESA Process l O cyclic Status Word SW gt Actual values gt Service messages acyclic f Parameter R W Requests Responses The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources e g digital and analog inputs Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 245 Setting up communication through the embedded modbus Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control the FMBA Modbus adapter if used
293. minutes after disconnecting the input power Checking the insulation of the assembly Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests e g hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically Input cable Check the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the u drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 D 2 Measure the insulation resistances of the motor cable and the motor between PE each phase and the Protective Earth by using a measuring voltage of 1 kV DC The insulation resistance must be higher than 1 Mohm Electrical installation 38 Connecting the power cables Connection diagram Drive INPUT OUTPUT PE ui vi wi BRK BRK 1 a PE jo For alternatives see A A section Supply disconnecting device As Optional brake on page 29 po resistor pal y a L1 L2 L3 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 Use a separate grounding cable if
294. mmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required if the recommended for input cables also conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors purpose a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE conductor i Shield i and shield S shield e PE PE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor PE PE Planning electrical installation 33 Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Ins
295. n Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start Enable Start Disable 7 signal i e control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 19 for Start Enable 2 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 O Start Enable 1 If Start Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source for the Start Enable 2 signal See parameter 7608 START NOT SEL ENABLE 1 See parameter 1608 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Activates deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT 2001 OVERVOLTAGE NO 2002 UNDERVOLTAGE 2003 and DEVICE OVERTEMP 2009 For more information see chapter Fault tracing NO Alarms are inactive 0 YES Alarms are active 1 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown DEFAULT Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows for e
296. n page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to http www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Control panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Battery 287 A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The Assistant Control Panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking On the front of the drive No power Green Power supply on the Green Drive in an alarm state If a control panel is board OK ttached to the dri aa o y ce pee asl Red nate i C
297. nections of application Macros s a aaaea cee 86 ABB Standard MAC Llica drid Gao ee ts a E tae pcos Oe O dc Bm a ae is ve 87 Default I O connectionS e e A EE ee TEE es 87 IES MaG O a ake eae LA ewe NE a E ab aed 88 Default I O connections eana ee ee ee a 88 Alternate Macro cai ta eo Ad eA a eh ed Be wee hee a de CSE ad ead Gey Ate oa 89 Default VO Connections coi ii A ee a ek Bie nh bo eas 89 Motor Potentiometer macro ts a Ela USS Sele ee oe E Dent GA eae E rat 90 Defaut VO Connections iii vw or eee ed dei ey ek rd a fd ed ete ee eee ye Bk 90 Hand Auto Macro tt td A carted saa Geko Gack den a ia 91 Default I O CONNECTIONS oes ais ser ate we dd be Uh Redes eke gw BAe eh bee eke 91 PID Control Macro i354 alot A A A A ead olds Calis beso ads Bd 92 Default l O CONNECIONS rero r eon aa a E A O ENE Ee wt Rose hae ee pense 2 92 Torque Control Macro 93 Default I O connectionS ee ee eee es 93 WI SOI MVACIOS tices are ded ers ate actos ek as hk dase Set Se eke ae aa eg a a e hes us 94 Table of contents 12 Program features What this chapter contains o o oooccco cee eee 95 Start p Assistants cs 4 teed bees Ga Oe we Oh ee eee ii 95 AAC o E Anas Beco 95 The default order of the tasks 0 0 0 0 00000 eee eee 95 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters 000 cece eee 96 Contents of the assistant displays 0 0 c eee ees 97 Local control
298. ned by parameter 2617 F4 2617 USER DEFINED F4 Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal to 95 of UN or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Maintenance triggers 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 0 counter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter 0 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter 0 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter 0 2905 IRUN TIME TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter 0 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter 0 2907 USER MWh TRIG Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0 counter 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption counter 0 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Programmable protection functions 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal falls NOT SEL below the set minimum limit Actual signals and parameters 152 Parameters short form list Index Name Selection Description Def Custom 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Selects how the drive
299. netises the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetising time is defined by parameter 2703 DC MAGN TIME If parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE value is VECTOR SPEED VECTOR TORQ DC magnetising guarantees the highest possible break away torque when the pre magnetising is set long enough Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC MAGN is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetising time has passed even if the motor magnetisation is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away torque is required Used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ The drive pre magnetises the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetising time is defined by parameter 2703 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetising time has passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed Ensure always in applications where a full break away torque is essential that the constant ma
300. ng frame sizes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail as shown in Figure a below To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive as shown in Figure b Mechanical installation 28 Fasten clamping plates See Figure a below 1 2 Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided screws Fasten the I O clamping plate to the clamping plate frame sizes RO R2 with the provided screws Attach the optional fieldbus module See Figure b above 3 Connect the power and control cables as instructed in chapter Electrical installation Place the fieldbus module on the option ground plate and tighten the grounding screw on the left corner of the fieldbus module This fastens the module to the option ground plate If the terminal cover is not already removed push the recess in the cover and simultaneously slide the cover off the frame Snap the fieldbus module attached to the option ground plate in position so that the module is plugged to the connection on the drive front and the screw holes in the option ground plate and the
301. nge when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 61 DLY has elapsed and DI1 is active DLY AND DI2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 62 DLY has elapsed and DI2 is active DLY AND DI3 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 63 DLY has elapsed and DI3 is active DLY AND DI4 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 64 DLY has elapsed and DI4 is active DLY AND DI5 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 65 DLY has elapsed and DI5 is active DLY amp Al2 H2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 66 DLY has elapsed and Al2 value gt par 8413 SEQ VAL 2 HIGH value DLY 8 Al2 L2 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 67 DLY has elapsed and Al2 value lt par 8414 SEQ VAL 2 LOW value DLY amp Al H1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 68 DLY has elapsed and Al1 value gt par 8411 SEQ VAL 1 HIGH value DLY 8 Al1 L1 State change when delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE 69 DLY has elapsed and Al1 value lt par 8412 SEQ VAL 1 LOW value Actual signals and parameters 237 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq COMM VAL1 0 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 0 1 state change 70 COMM VAL1 1 0135 COMM VALUE 1 bit 1 1 state change 71 COMM VAL1 2 0135 COMM VALUE 1 b
302. ngle tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity A random component with an average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Note Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz DISABLE DISABLE Disabled 0 ENABLE Enabled 1 2610 USER DEFINED U1 Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by parameter 2677 USER DEFINED F1 See section Custom U f ratio on page 112 19 of Un 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 1 1V 2611 USER DEFINED F1 Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2612 USER DEFINED U2 Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency defined by parameter 2673 USER DEFINED F2 See section Custom U f ratio on page 112 38 of Un 0 120 of Uy V Voltage Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 195 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 2613 USER DEFINED F2 Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2614 USER DEFINED U3 Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the frequency 47 5 of Un defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3 See section Custom U f ratio on
303. nnection diagram of the drive on page 38 Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor e Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 Fuses To Thermal switch of the resistor 1 qd 3 N 2 4 ACS350 O O O U1 V1 Wi Parameter set up To enable resistor braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control by setting parameter 2005 to 0 DISABLE Technical data 305 Dimensions Dimensional drawings of the ACS350 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches Dimensions 306 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 IO NI NU c Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AFE68488079 B Dimensions 307 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 eg 5 5
304. not connected Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet Route the cables R lt a Check the insulation of the input cable and the motor and the motor cable E Connect the power cables E Connect the control cables Check the installation A Commission the drive See Technical data Ratings on page 290 Planning electrical installation on page 29 Technical data on page 290 Mechanical installation Unpacking the drive on page 25 Hardware description Type code on page 23 Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 38 Mechanical installation on page 25 Planning electrical installation Routing the cables on page 35 Electrical installation Checking the insulation of the assembly on page 37 Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 38 Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 40 Installation checklist on page 43 Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 45 About the manual 21 Hardware description What this chapter contains The chapter describes the construction and type code information in short Overview The ACS350 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC motors The construction of frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent IED Covers on RO and R1 Covers off RO and R1
305. nput PID CONTROL PID control For application in which the drive controls a process value E g 6 pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive TORQUE CTRL Torque control macro 8 Actual signals and parameters 239 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter 31 view is selected by parameter 7677 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customisation of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English USER S1 LOAD User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved 0 parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S1 SAVE Save User 1 macro Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 1 model USER S2 LOAD User 2 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved 2 parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S2 SAVE Save User 2 macro Stores the current parameter settings and the motor 3 model USER S3 LOAD User 3 macro loaded into use Before loading check that the saved 4 parameter settings and the motor model are suit
306. nstructions given in this manual 4 Motor cable length maximum 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC filter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Product protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 612 604 6 094 364 6 252 436 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 940 253 6 977 449 7 03
307. nt l AO content 1502 1503 1503 1502 X X Setting range depends on parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Defines the maximum value for signal selected with parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL See figure in parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN X X Setting range depends on parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO See figure in 0 parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Minimum value 1 0 1 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO See figure in 20 parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Maximum value 1 0 1mA Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 171 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO i e the time within 63 0 1 of a step change is reached See figure in parameter 1303 FILTER Al 0 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 1 0 1s 16 SYSTEM Run Enable parameter lock etc CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run Enable signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run Enable signal 0 DI External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Run Enable If Run 1 Enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running DI2 See selec
308. ny danger De couple the driven machine if e there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power REM 0 0 Zz The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode OUTPUT FWD The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start REM CHOICE Do you want to up Assistant If you press gt the Start up Assistant is not use the start up i dihi rai assistant run and you can continue with manual start up in a similar manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel NO EXIT 00 00 OK Start up control with I O and ID Run 47 MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA parameter group 99 If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language REM PAR EDIT the Basic Control Panel does not support languages See 9901 LANGUAGE parameter 9907 for the values of the available language ENGLISH alternatives 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel on page 63 Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 74 The general parameter setting p
309. o get help Step Action Display Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UHELP This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys Ay and SY 7 LOC UHELP external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 EXIT After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing 7 LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 Q1 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL How to find out the panel version Step Action Display If the power is switched on switch it off Keep key pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel FW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the key the panel goes to the Output mode PANEL VERSION INFO Panel Fw X XX ROM CRC XXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXXX
310. oe 132 DiagGnOstcs nein ee eA A Sanaa ee ee ata hei eae ees 132 Countea esea a ee Oe Bee hoe eee hee eal ee edb he oR eet acs 133 Settings eset tg AS conte As acs ate or e nero Ate or ce eA he O NE ote Ae Ne 133 DiagQnOSuGs cara DEAL Re ahah eee Pe Pete Phan hoe en Ea epee 133 Sequence programming o 133 SOUNDS Morada he A oath eee E emt dk dee ASS de 134 DIagGnOStlGs uti tisk anus ioe ec atk Heh eee aiid Tage aren da DO A 134 Example T ici cir ia bate O A Bees bee A lal Bae ete Ra 136 Example 2 mieri rra Bea dated ea bated a BaD Gow ea eee gees 137 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains 00 00 cc eee 141 Terms and abbreviationS scare ruinie eia Dan akaa ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 141 Fieldbus addresses Mi E Bs ees Ait Sc re AI ee tat ee ne Sue ee 141 Fisldbus equivalent ui a at Se eee ua 141 Default values with different Macros o oo oooo ee ee eee 142 ActualsignalS exo a ee eae aie pace eee ae ee A A elie ae pce eee Bek 143 Ot OPERATING DATA 24 e sce cd kd dea eg dd ahs tas Gods a la grad wee 143 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS cta wed athe tae oe Sali oe Ba eae oth ee a 145 O4sFAUIET RAIS STORT ts he oe hc a A ao bes use uals ins duis hee a aisla 147 Parameters short to Ml iii a a wiv eda hearse data 148 Table of contents Parameters complete descriptions o oooocccccooo eee 159 10 STARTU STOPIDIR nacio wise abel Ata o ad 159 11 REFERENCE SELECT uti ii date cn a hg eld ied Boden S
311. oe eh Oo es Dek ha ee eee S E 5 Installation and maintenance work 00 000 cee eee eae 6 Operation and Startup 7 Table of contents About the manual What this chapter contains asaan 0000 eee 19 Compatibility ao a a bade he SA o a 19 Intended audience ak ura otr ha E o A wae 19 Categorization according to the frame size oooo oococoooo eee 19 Product and service inquirieS a E aS A ee 19 Product training iio stan ea ewe sme ee GRA Ee Ga ea pe a BEE A E TE 19 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 0 0 0 00 ccc ee ee ees 19 Installation and commissioning flowchart 00 000 c eee eee 20 Hardware description What this chaptercontainS oca ar ae gee bas ea eee eee ga Pee wale 21 OVET EW e ae IS RN EA A i iin WEG Sa ds ae ee eee Meda ek 21 Overview Connections e a a a a E eee tenet Ea 22 INP COE e A A A In da Ns 23 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains ieie es a e naoi ai a eee 25 Unpackinothe drive dot A Re E S ie ae 25 Delivery Check siosio pay ir ga pk a T bas 26 Before installation s css acca ba tee ea A Aa gaa a a aa dee Ea 26 Requirements for the installation site 0 0 00 0000 eee 26 Mounting the rive aie vies oe acd eae e tke Chee Nae a eed Pa be ena arin dee hs 27 Mount the drive ico res we ee ee ee ee ee PER pe ee a eae ees 27 Fasten clamping plateS a m a a h BEA eee 28 Attach the optional fieldbus module
312. of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if e there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use the Start up Assistant e Press SS when is highlighted to run the Start up Assistant Press if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant e Press key vy gt to highlight R9 and then press if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive SELECTING THE LANGUAGE If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with keys a v and press Sy to accept If you press gt the Start up Assistant is stopped STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys lt lt v and SAVE press S to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press 5 gt the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode REM CHOI
313. ogger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with LOC UY FAULT LOG keys 4 gt and S Y7 and pressing SS The display shows the fault log 10 19 03 05 E 57 starting with the latest fault 6 DC UNDERVOLT 6 AIl LOSS The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing EXIT 00 00 DETAIL 3 To see the details of a fault select it with keys ay and Cw_ and press LOC UPANEL LOSS DETAIL FAULT 10 FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG 4 pe LOC UDIAGNOSTICS To show the help text press ST Scroll the help text with keys 74n and vn After reading the help press lt to return to the previous display Check Comm lines and connections parameter 3002 parameters in groups 10 and 11 EXIT 00 00 OK Control panels Time and Date mode In the Time and Date mode you can e show or hide the clock e change date and time display formats set the date and time 79 e enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to da
314. ol panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key eif you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 62 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local control press C gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly To start the drive in local control press gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Step Action Display is If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing C The display briefly shows message LoC before a HZ returning to the previous display OUTPUT FWD 2 To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to LOC reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press a a HZ OUTPUT REV Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels Output mode In the Output mode you can 61 monitor actual values of up to three group 07
315. on The Earth Fault Protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is active only during start An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple If a phase is lost the ripple increases Settings Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE Preprogrammed faults Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is 162 V for 200 V drives and 308 V for 400 V drives Program features 118 Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has adjustable limits for speed current maximum torque maximum and DC voltage Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS
316. on How to perform the ID Run on page 54 0012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in stall region Check motor load and drive ratings 7121 due E e g excessive load or Check fault function parameters 0305 bit 11 insufficient motor power programmable fault function 3010 3012 0014 EXT FAULT 1 External fault 1 Check external devices for faults 9000 Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 setting 0305 bit 13 programmable fault function 3003 0015 EXT FAULT 2 External fault 2 Check external devices for faults 9001 Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 setting 0305 bit 14 programmable fault function 3004 0016 EARTH FAULT Drive has detected earth Check motor 2330 0305 bit 15 programmable fault function 3017 ground fault in motor or motor cable Check fault function parameters Check motor cable Motor cable length must not exceed maximum specifications See section Motor connection on page 296 Fault tracing 280 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0017 UNDERLOAD Motor load is too low due to e g Check for problem in driven equipment FF6A release mechanism in driven Check fault function parameters 0306 bit O equipment Check motor power against unit power programmable fault function 3013 3015 0018 THERM FAIL Drive internal fault Thermistor Contact your local ABB representative 5210 used for drive internal 0306 bit 1 temperature measurement is op
317. on direction of the motor or fixes the direction REQUEST FORWARD Fixed to forward d REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2 REQUEST Direction of rotation control allowed 3 1010 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function See section Jogging on NOT SEL page 129 DI1 Digital input DI1 O jogging inactive 1 jogging active 1 DI2 See selection D11 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for jogging 1 or 2 activation i e control word 6 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bits 20 and 21 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 NOT SEL Not selected 0 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 1 jogging inactive O jogging active 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 161 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 11 REFERENCE Panel reference type external control location selection and external SELECT reference sources and limits 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the type of the reference in local control mode REF 1 REF 1 Hz rpm Speed
318. opean Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types a switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Planning electrical installation 30 Thermal overload and short circuit protection A The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current Protection against short circuit inside the drive or in the supply cable Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and board input cable with fuses or a circuit breaker 1 nd See footnotes 1 and E a a 5 1
319. ormal drive operation continues Motor speed DC Hold Ref DC hold speed A t Note DC Hold has no effect if the start signal is switched off Note Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up In applications where long DC hold times are required externally ventilated motors should be used If the DC hold period is long the DC hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor 1 DC BRAKING DC current braking function active If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST DC braking is applied after the start command is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP DC braking is applied after the ramp 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Defines the DC hold speed See parameter 2704 DC HOLD CTL 0 360 rpm Speed 1 1 rpm Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 185 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC hold current See parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL 30 0 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal current parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM 1 1 CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time 0 0 0 250 0 s Time 1 0 1s 2108 START INHIBIT Enables the start inhibit function Drive start is inhibited if OFF fault is reset Run Enable signal activates while the start command
320. otal energy consumption and motor noise level when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and the drive can be improved by 1 to 10 depending on the load torque and speed The disadvantage of this function is that the dynamic performance of the drive is weakened OFF Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 193 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq OFF Inactive 0 ON Active 1 2602 FLUX BRAKING Activates deactivates the Flux Braking function See section Flux Braking on OFF page 708 OFF Inactive 0 ON Active 1 2603 IR COMP VOLT Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR compensation The Type function is useful in applications with high break away torque when vector dependent control cannot be applied To prevent overheating set IR compensation voltage as low as possible The figure below illustrates the IR compensation Note The function can be used only when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ A pase A IR compensated votage B No compensation Typical IR compensation values Py kW 0 37 0 75 2 2 4 0 7 5 200 240 V units 2603 IR comp V 8 4 7 7 5 6 8 4 N A 380 480 V units IR comp V 14 14 5 6 8 4 7 0 0 100 0 V Voltage boost 1 0 1V 2604 IR COMP FREQ Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V See
321. ote The ramp shape time is set to zero during the jogging i e linear ramp Program features 130 Jogging function uses constant speed 7 as jogging speed and acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 It is also possible to activate jogging function 1 or 2 through fieldbus Jogging function 1 uses constant speed 7 and jogging function 2 uses constant speed 6 Both functions use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 Settings Parameter Additional information 1010 Jogging activation 1208 Jogging speed 1208 1207 Jogging speed for jogging function 1 2 activated through fieldbus 2112 Zero speed delay 2205 2206 Acceleration and deceleration times 2207 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shape time Set to zero during the jogging i e linear ramp Diagnostics Actual values Additional information 0302 Jogging 1 2 activation through fieldbus 1401 Jogging function status through RO 1805 Jogging function status through DO Program features Timed functions 131 A variety of drive functions can be time controlled e g start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers four start and stop times START TIME 1 4 STOP TIME 1 4 e four start and stop days START DAY 1 4 STOP DAY 1 4 four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together TIMED FUNC 1 4 booster time an additional booster
322. other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential Planning electrical installation 36 A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Motor cable Drive Power cable min 300 mm 12 in Input power cable Motor cable min 200 mm 8 in 90 min 500 mm 20 in Control cables Control cable ducts 24 V 230 V 24V 230V Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in insulated for 230 V or insulated with an separate ducts inside the cabinet insulation sleeving for 230 V Planning electrical installation 37 Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter describes the electrical installation procedure of the drive electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 5 Ignoring the safety WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5
323. otor load must be connected to the motor OFF No autotuning 0 ON Activates the speed controller autotuning The drive 1 accelerates the motor calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation parameter 2301 PROP GAIN 2302 INTEGRATION TIME and 2304 ACC COMPENSATION values Setting is automatically reverted to OFF 24 TORQUE CONTROL Torque control variables 2401 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time i e the minimum time for the 0 reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 0 00 120 00 s Time 1 0 01s 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time i e the minimum time for the O reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero 0 00 120 00 s Time 1 0 01s Actual signals and parameters 192 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Speed bands within which the drive is not allowed to operate 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL Activates deactivates the critical speeds function The critical speed function OFF avoids specific speed ranges Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz and 46 to 52 Hz To make the drive to jump over the vibration speed ranges Activate the critical speeds function Set the critical speed ranges as in the figure
324. otor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 14 REF Al1 Al2 50 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 163 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 15 REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 16 REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation 17 REF Al1 50 Al2 DI4U 5D See selection DI3U 4D 30 DI4U 5D NC See selection DI3U 4D NC 31 FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32 SEQ PROG Sequence programming output See parameter 8420 ST1 REF SEL 33 Al1 SEQ PROG Addition of analog input Al1 and sequence programming output 34 Al2 SEQ PROG Addition of analog input Al2 and sequence programming output 35 1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1 Corresponds to the 0 minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Minimum value in rpm Hz if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is 1 0 1 Hz 0 30000 rpm SCALAR FREQ 1 rpm Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the reference source value of parameter 1103 is Al1 The reference minimum and maximum corr
325. ou are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys erm Be UPLOAD TO PANEL C amp S and S yY 7 and pressing Sy BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup with keys lt 4 and S Y7 and LOC UBACKUP INFO SEL 3 a F DRIVE TYPE press Sj The display shows the following information about the drive where ACS350 the backup was made 32394 DRIVE RATING i DRIVE TYPE type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where EXIT 00 00 XXX Nominal current rating If present an A indicates a LOC EBACKUP INFO _ decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A 3562 DRIVE RATING Y do 3301 FIRMWARE 4 400 V 241a hex 6 600 V EXIT 00 00 Zz i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys As and S Y 7 4 EXIT LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 Press EF to return to the Par Backup BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL Control panels 84 O Settings mode In the I O Settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal e edit the parameter set
326. ou get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys aus CESSES m 1 i CA and S Y 7 and pressing wie Motor Set up Application Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the assistant with keys A gt and S Y7 and press SS LOC UPAR EDIT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first assistant which guides Bo you Wane to you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 continue with and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the o setup next assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys CA gt gt and Sk1 A and press SS If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the EXIT 00 00 OK same question about the next assistant and so on 4 e To specify a new value press keys A and SY 7 LOC UPAR EDIT e To ask for information on the requested parameter press key O Scroll the help text with keys lt 4 and S Y7 Close the help by pressing wae 9905 MOTOR_NOM VOLT
327. ower supply imbalance 3130 eal bus naa mg Check fault function parameters 0306 bit 5 a i programmable fault function 3016 Alarm is generated when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible communication profile Contact your local ABB representative 5010 Corrupted panel parameter backup file Retry parameter upload Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from another source Change drive control to local control mode 5012 Direction of rotation is locked Enable change of direction See parameter 1003 DIRECTION 5013 Panel control is disabled because start inhibit is Deactivate start inhibit and retry See active parameter 2108 START INHIBIT 5014 Panel control is disabled because of drive fault Reset drive fault and retry 5015 Panel control is disabled because local control Deactivate local control mode lock and retry mode lock is active See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK 5018 Parameter default value is not found Contact your local ABB representative 5019 Writing non zero parameter value is prohibited Only parameter reset is allowed 5020 Parameter or parameter group does not exist or Contact your local ABB represen
328. own by default on the panel 1 0 1 Hz Output mode display 0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A Shown by default on the panel Output 1 0 1A mode display 0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque 1 0 1 0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 1 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE Measured intermediate circuit voltage in VDC 1 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Calculated motor voltage in VAC 1 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in C 1 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz Unit depends on parameter 9904 1 0 1 Hz MOTOR CTRL MODE setting 1 rpm 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in percent Depending on the use 100 equals 1 0 1 the maximum motor speed nominal motor torque or maximum process reference 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 See section Local 1 1 control vs external control on page 97 0114 RUN TIME R Elapsed drive running time counter hours The counter can be reset by 1 1h pressing the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in Parameter mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R kWh counter The counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN 1 1kWh buttons simultaneously when the control panel is in Parameter mode 0120 Al1 Relative value of analog input Al1 in percent 1 0 1 0121 Al2 Relative value of analog input Al2 in percent 1 0 1 0124 AO1 Value of analog output AO in mA 1 0 1mA 0126 PID1 OUTPUT Output
329. p EXT2 Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 3 ALWAYS Enabled in external control locations 1 and 2 EXT1 and EXT2 and in local 4 control LOCAL 8402 SEQ PROG START Selects the source for the sequence programming activation signal NOT SEL When sequence programming is activated the programming starts from the previously used state If sequence programming activation signal is lost the sequence programming is stopped and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero Sequence programming state 0168 SEQ PROG STATE remains unchanged If start from the first sequence programming state is required the sequence programming must be reset by parameter 8404 SEQ PROG RESET If start from the first sequence programming state is always required reset and start signal sources must be through the same digital input 8404 and 8402 SEQ PROG START Note The drive will not start if no Run Enable signal is received 1601 RUN ENABLE DI1 INV Sequence programming activation through inverted digital input D11 1 0 active 1 inactive DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No sequence programming activation signal DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input DI1 1 active 1 0 inactive DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 DRIVE S
330. p level when 4005 0 gt See also figures in parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4026 WAKE UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See parameter 4023 PID 0 5 SLEEP LEVEL 0 00 60 00 s Wake up delay 1 0 01s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that selects SET1 between PID parameter set 1 and 2 PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101 4126 SET 1 PID SET 1 is active 0 DI1 Digital input DI1 1 PID SET 2 0 PID SET 1 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 SET 2 PID SET 2 is active 7 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1 2 control Timed function 1 inactive PID SET 1 timed 8 function 1 active PID SET 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 9 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 10 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 11 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O PID SET 2 1 PID SET 1 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Description Process PID PI
331. pecify a new value for the parameter with keys lt 4 and SY 7 LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1 down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 5 0 HZ displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 To accept the new value press SI If the new value is the default value the LOC CCHANGED PAR parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters te CANCEL e To cancel the new value and keep the original press E 1202 CONST SPEED 1 15 0 Hz 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels 78 Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can e view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory e see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory e read the help text for the fault start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC UMAIN MENU 1 by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Fault L
332. plays the drive current and voltage ratings 0x0000 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Displays the version of the parameter table used in the drive 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel in 103 display mode 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par DIRECT 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by Hz parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control panel in 104 display mode 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by par 3408 DIRECT SIGNAL2 PARAM 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal s
333. put and output data words The drive supports at the maximum the use of 10 data words in each direction Data transformed from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameter group 54 FBA DATA IN and data transformed from the fieldbus controller to the drive is defined by parameter group 55 FBA DATA OUT Fieldbus network Fieldbus module Fieldbus specific interface DATA IN 1 10 DATA OUT 10 Data in select 4 Status Word 5 ACT1 6 ACT2 5401 5410 Par 0102 9910 Data out select 1 Control Word 2 REF1 3 REF2 5501 5510 Par 0102 9910 1 See also other COMM selection parameters Start stop dir select NOT SEL i N 1 COMM 1001 1002 REF1 select KEYPAD 5 COMM 6 1103 REF2 select KEYPAD 5 Fan COMM 1106 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 271 The Control Word and the Status Word The Control Word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control Word The Status Word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus con
334. r analog input Al1 If parameter 3007 AI lt MIN 0 FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al1 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 If parameter 3007 AI lt MIN 0 FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al2 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and motor cable ENABLE connection is detected i e the input power cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive Note Changing this parameter setting is not recommended in normal use The protection is to be disabled only with corner grounded delta power systems and very long cables DISABLE No action 0 ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic fault reset Automatic resets are possible only for certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is activated for that fault type 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the 0 time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number within the
335. r controlled drive IR compensation is active only when the motor Motor voltage control mode is scalar see section Scalar control on page 115 When IR compensation is IR compensation activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is No compensation useful in applications that require high breakaway torque In vector control no IR compensation is possible needed f Hz Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Programmable protection functions Al lt Min Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Panel Loss Panel Loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as control location for the drive stops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Program features 116 External Fault External Faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Stall Protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010
336. r macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the drive using only digital signals To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al Not in use by default 0 10 V 3 GND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA 5 Al2 Not in use by default 0 10 V 6 GND Analog input circuit common max 500 ohm 7 a lt 7_ AO Motor speed value 0 20 mA E J L 2 8 GND Analog output circuit common 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common 12 DI Stop 0 Start 1 13 DI2 Forward 0 Reverse 1 14 DI3 Speed reference up 1 15 DI4 Speed reference down 1 a 16 DI5 Constant speed 1 parameter 1202 X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 18 RONC No fault Fault 1 119 RONO aS 20 DOSRC Digital output max 100 mA amp 21 DOOUT ye No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 If DI3 and D14 are both active or inactive the speed referen
337. r speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan See section Power loss ride through on page 107 DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated 0 ENABLE TIME Undervoltage control activated The undervoltage control is active for 500 ms ENABLE Undervoltage control activated No operation time limit 2 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 181 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 2007 MINIMUM FREQ Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency 0 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Note MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ f f 2007 value is lt 0 T 2007 value is gt 0 2008 Allowed frequency range Allowed frequency range 2007 0 gt 0 gt 2007 t 2007 Allowed frequency range 2008 500 0 500 0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Eur 50 US 60 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 0 1 Hz 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive MIN TORQUE 1 MIN
338. r start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the See section ABB Standard connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro macro on page 87 Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch In remote control the panel between remote and local control display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR Start by switching digital input DI1 on 0 0 Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the SE n n setpoint is reached OUTPUT FWD Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the 5 0 0 voltage of analog input Al1 BEN Ww OUTPUT FWD CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on 5 00 REM HZ OUTPUT REV Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off 5 0 0 REM HZ OUTPUT FWD STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops 00 Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly REM n na Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating OUTPUT END
339. rameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 42 EXT TRIM PID External Trim PID PID2 control See section PID control on page 120 4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4202 INTEGRATION TIME See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 4203 DERIVATION TIME See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME 4204 PID DERIV FILTER See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 4205 ERROR VALUE INV See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS 4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE 4208 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4209 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 4210 SETPOINT SEL See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 4212 SETPOINT MIN See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN Actual signals and parameters 222 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4213 SETPOINT MAX See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX 4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 4216 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4217 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM See parameter 4018 ACT1 MAXIMUM 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 4228 ACTIVATE
340. resets the same register reference in all attached slaves 10 16 Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers 4X references When registers broadcast the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves 17 23 Read Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write registers operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single modbus transaction Write operation is performed before the read operation Note In the modbus data message register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx 1 For example register 40002 is addressed as 0001 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The drive supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table Code Name Description 01 Illegal Function Unsupported command 02 Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read write protected 03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive e Value is outside minimum or maximum limits e Parameter is read only e Message is too long e Parameter write is not allowed when start is active Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected Drive parameter 5378 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 258 Communication profiles The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles DCU communication profile e ABB Drives Limited
341. ress 7 Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels How to set the speed frequency or torque reference 73 Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly until you get there REM 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC Y control by pressing E The display briefly shows a message about changing 49 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 gt 5 A 10 7 Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference O modification in remote control DIR 00 00 MENU 3 e To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner ofthe LOC U display press lt 45 The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive 5 0 A 0 HZ permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 0 5 A O e To decrease the value press w_ 10 of DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press EP repeatedly until you get there Loc Y 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 e To increase the contrast press keys Sul and lt simultaneously Loc Y e To decrease the contrast press keys as and S Y 7 simultaneously 43 a L We 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU Control panels 74
342. rive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Speed compensated stop on page 108 If the direction of rotation is reverse the drive is stopped along a ramp 4 SPD COMP REV Speed compensation is used for constant distance braking if the direction of rotation is reverse Speed difference between used speed and maximum speed is compensated by running the drive with current speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp See section Speed compensated stop on page 108 If the direction of rotation is forward the drive is stopped along a ramp 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetising time See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION After the start command the drive automatically pre magnetises the motor the set time 0 3 0 00 10 00 s Magnetising time Set this value long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long time heats the motor excessively 1 0 01s 2104 DC HOLD CTL Activates the DC Hold or DC braking function NOT SEL NOT SEL Inactive 0 DC HOLD DC Hold function active DC Hold is not possible if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE setting is SCALAR FREQ When both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter 2705 DC HOLD SPEED the drive will stop generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the motor The current is set by parameter 2106 DC CURR REF When the reference speed exceeds parameter 2705 value n
343. rminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp 3 Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals 4 Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal 5 Digital signals Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals Twist the grounding conductors and shields if any of the digital signal cables to a bundle and connect to the SCR terminal 7 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically Unless you need to install the optional fieldbus module see page 28 slide the terminal cover back in place e e Electrical installation 43 Installation checklist Checklist Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on the first pages of this manual before you work on the drive Check O O O OooOdadgdadda a O MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION See Planning electrical installation and Electrical installation The ambient operating conditions are
344. rocedure REM E F 1 To go to the Main menu press 7 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT r otherwise press 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU FWD 2 Press keys A3 Cw_ until you see PAr and press 7 REM 0 1 PAR FWD 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with keys a v_ and press REM 2 O 0 1 y PAR FWD 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys CENG Y Z REM 2 0 0 2 PAR FWD 5 Press and hold 7 for about two seconds until the parameter value is REM 1 5 0 0 rpm shown with under the value PAR FWD 6 Change the value with keys A A The value changes faster while REM 1 6 0 0 rpm you keep the key pressed down PAR FWD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing SY REM 2 O O 2 PAR FWD Select the application macro parameter 9902 The general REM 9 9 O 2 PAR FWD parameter setting procedure is given above The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 REM 9 9 0 4 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is PAR FWD suitable for torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20 of the nominal current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Start
345. rol with embedded fieldbus 261 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of Control Word CW and Status Word SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 ip OFF3 OFF2 de FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit 4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 1 0 v gt gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON f SW Bit1 0 OFF1 INPUT POWER OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW BitO 0 gt A BCD NOT READY rae TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO Si SW Bit0 1 SW Bita 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON CERS OPERATION INHIBITED CW Xxxx X1 XX Xxxx x111 gt B C D READY TO SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION a C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 1 CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxx1 1111 gt i e Bit4 1 RFG OUTPUT Site a ENABLED lt ma State change i B CW Bit6 0 Path described in example CW xxxx x1 xx xx11 1111 CW Control Word SW Status Word gt i e Bit5 1 RFG Ramp Function Generator C RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED Par 0104 CURRENT A f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CW Xxxxx x1 xx x111 1111 i e Bit6 1 n Speed Supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile OPERATING SW Bit8 1 D 1 State transition also occurs if the fault
346. rque is 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in 1234567 8 171819 X1A 1 SCR 9 24V X1B 17 ROCOM 2 Al1 10 GND 18 RONC 3 GND 11 DCOM 19 RONO S1 4 10V 12 DI1 20 DOSRC E 5 Al2 13 DI2 21 DOOUT mA El 6 GND 14 DI3 22 DOGND V ale 7 AO 15 DI4 N 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 2021 22 8 GND 16 DI5 digital or frequency input XX X1A X1B Default connection The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is selected with parameter 9902 See chapter Application macros for the connection diagrams Voltage and current selection Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 10 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 The factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros Top position 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V S1 Al Odo Al2 Hmm Voltage and current connection Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 102 for how to set parameters accordingly
347. rt the drive digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 DI2 Pulse stop through digital input DI3 1 gt 0 Stop To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST KEYPAD Start stop and direction commands through control panel when EXT1 is active To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1F 2R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 DI1 DI2 Operation 0 O Stop O Start forward 1 1 Start reverse Stop 1 0 1 Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop commands i e control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 262 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start stop control Timed function 1 active start timed function 1 inactive stop See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 12 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 13 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 14 DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5 0 stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD 20 Act
348. ry ten minutes l2 1min 10min Maximum 50 overload current allowed for one minute every ten minutes lomax maximum output current Available for two seconds at start otherwise as long as allowed by the drive temperature Py typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F Derating The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 aie 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 lz
349. s US Output frequency 9907 WARNING Never connect a motor to a drive which is connected to power line with voltage level higher than the rated motor voltage 115 345 V 200 V Voltage 1 1V units Note The stress on the motor insulations is always dependent on the drive 200 600 V 400 V supply voltage This also applies to the case where the motor voltage rating units Eur is lower than the rating of the drive and the supply of the drive 230 690 V 400 V units US 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current Must be equal to the value on the motor lon rating plate 0 2 2 0 lon Current 1 0 1A 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency i e the frequency at which the output Eur 50 voltage equals the motor nominal voltage US 60 Field weakening point Nom frequency Supply voltage Mot nom voltage 10 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the value on the motor Type rating plate dependent 50 30000 rpm Speed 1 1 rpm 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating Px POWER plate 0 2 3 0 Py kW Power 1 0 1 kW hp 9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run OFF During this process the drive operates the motor and makes measurements DMAGN in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations O
350. s see parameter 1605 Note User macro load restores the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between three motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as three user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros 95 Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up Assistant Introduction The The Start up Assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up Assistant also checks that the entered values are valid i e within the allowed range The Start up Assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task Language Select automatically The user may activate the
351. s This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Wait until 0309 bit 2 on drive indicates that motor identification is completed 2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start Enable 1 signal Check parameter 1608 START ENABLE settings MISSING received Check digital input connections 0309 bit 4 Check fieldbus communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start Enable 2 signal Check parameter 1609 START ENABLE 2 settings MISSING received Check digital input connections 0309 bit 5 Check fieldbus communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue operation STOP emergency stop command Return emergency stop push button to normal position 0309 bit 6 and ramps to stop according to ramp time defined by parameter 2208 EMER DEC TIME Fault tracing 276 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2024 ENCODER ERR Communication fault Check pulse encoder and its wiring pulse encoder interface 7301 between pulse encoder module and its wiring and parameter group 50 ENCODER and pulse encoder settings 0306 bit 6 interface module or programmable between module and drive fault function 5003 2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is 0309 bit 8 magnetisation is on This completed alarm belongs to normal start up procedure 2026 INPUT PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses LOSS voltage is oscillating ae to Check for input p
352. s off the current when necessary It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more information on the thermal model see section Motor Thermal Protection on page 116 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 124 Planning electrical installation 32 Selecting the power cables General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations The cable must be able to carry the drive load current See chapter Technical data for the rated currents The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Additional US requirements on page 33 The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 VAC Refer to chapter Technical data for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded sy
353. sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the a and v arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Time and Date Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing Control panels Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu The status line see section Status line on page 68 shows the name of the current menu mode item or state 69 LOC 49 1 HZ 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER
354. stic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Technical data Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 299 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 301 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the i
355. t Booster time 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SCR Timed function can NOT SEL consists of 0 4 time periods and a booster NOT SEL No time periods selected 0 T1 Time period 1 1 T2 Time period 2 2 T1 T2 Time periods 1 and 2 3 T3 Time period 3 4 T1 T3 Time periods 1 and 3 5 T2 T3 Time periods 2 and 3 6 T1 T2 T3 Time periods 1 2 and 3 7 T4 Time period 4 8 T1 T4 Time periods 1 and 4 9 T2 T4 Time periods 2 and 4 10 T1 T2 T4 Time periods 1 2 and 4 11 T3 T4 Time periods 4 and 3 12 T1 T3 T4 Time periods 1 3 and 4 13 T2 T3 T4 Time periods 2 3 and 4 14 T1 T2 T3 T4 Time periods 1 2 3 and 4 15 BOOSTER Booster 16 T1 B Booster and time period 1 17 T2 B Booster and time period 2 18 T1 T2 B Booster and time periods 1 and 2 19 T3 B Booster and time period 3 20 T1 T3 B Booster and time periods 1 and 3 21 T2 T3 B Booster and time periods 2 and 3 22 T1 T2 T3 B Booster and time periods 1 2 and 3 23 T4 B Booster and time period 4 24 T1 T4 B Booster and time periods 1 and 4 25 T2 T4 B Booster and time periods 2 and 4 26 T1 T2 T4 B Booster and time periods 1 2 and 4 27 Actual signals and parameters 214 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq T3 T4 B Booster and time periods 3 and 4 28 T1 T3 T4 B Booster and time periods 1 3 and 4 29 T2 T3 T4 B Booster and time periods 2 3 and 4 30 T1 2 3 4 B Booster and t
356. t 10 kohm 0 1 11 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 VDC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 VDC with internal or external supply PNP and NPN Pulse train 0 16 kHz X1A 16 only 2 4 kohm NO NC 250 VAC 30 VDC 0 5 A 30 VDC 5 A 230 VAC 2 A rms Transistor output PNP 30 VDC 100 mA 30 VDC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1 Hz 0 2 1 5 0 25 mm 16 24 AWG 0 5 N m 4 4 Ibf in Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 IEC 60439 1 UL 508C The brake resistor output is conditionally short circuit proof by IEC EN 61800 5 1 and UL 508C For correct fuse selection contact your local ABB representative Rated conditional short circuit current as defined in IEC 60439 1 and the Short circuit test current by UL 508C is 100 kA Efficiency Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Cooling Method RO Natural convection cooling R1 R4 Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space around the drive See chapter Mechanical installation page 26 Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a connection box Technical data 298 Ambient conditions Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated
357. t Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM 19 START_DISABLE2 1 No Start Enable 0 Enable start Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM 20 JOGGING 1 1 Activate jogging 1 Effective if parameter 1010 setting is COMM See section Jogging on page 129 0 Jogging 1 disabled 21 JOGGING 2 1 Activate jogging 2 Effective if parameter 1010 setting is COMM See section Jogging on page 129 0 Jogging 2 disabled 22 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 0 No operation 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 0 No operation 29 LINK_ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link This is an internal control bit Only for supervision 0 Fieldbus link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit 0 No start inhibit 31 Reserved Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 264 The following tables describe the Status Word content for the DCU profile DCU Profile Status Word par 0303 Bit Name Value Status O READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No external Run Enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating
358. t 15 1009 PAR PCU 1 Incorrect motor nominal speed Check parameter settings Following must apply 6320 frequency setting 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR 0307 bit 15 NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor poles lt 0 992 1015 PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect voltage to frequency Check parameter 2610 2617 settings 6320 U f ratio voltage setting 0307 bit 15 1017 PAR SETUP 1 It is not allowed to use MTAC Disable frequency output frequency input or 6320 encoder module frequency encoder 0307 bit 15 input signal and frequency change transistor output to digital mode value of output signal simultaneously parameter 1804 DIGITAL or change frequency input selection to other value in parameter groups 11 REFERENCE SELECT 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 42 EXT TRIM PID or disable parameter 5002 and remove MTAC encoder module Fault tracing 283 Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do Check that the network master is connected and properly configured e Check the cable connection Same device address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CR
359. t be powered externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 41 Tightening torque 0 5 Num 4 4 Ibf in Application macros 94 User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create three user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user macro but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1 The procedure for the other two user macros is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To create User macro 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER e Press DO Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel To recall User macro 1 e Change parameter 9902 to O USER S1 LOAD MENU SAVE ENTER e Press SS Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel to load The user macro can also be switched through digital input
360. t suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the I O terminal block Varistor SE A Te o Drive zow RC filter iH A NOA o ure 230 VAC Sl SoU Diode me E A e o 4 Drive j 2 voC ee E A A tse ray Al Residual current device RCD compatibility ACS350 01x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type A ACS350 03x drives with residual current devices of Type B For ACS350 03x drives other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Selecting the control cables All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a e g JAMAK by NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals Planning electrical installation 35 A double shielded cable is the best alternativ
361. tall condition The protection wakes NOT SEL up if the drive has operated in a stall region see figure below longer than the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME With vector control Torque 4 user defined limit Current A 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Stall region 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 applies for positive and negative torques 0 95 user defined limit l With scalar control user f defined limit 2003 MAX CURRENT Par 3011 The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE NOT SEL Protection is inactive 0 FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor coast to a stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL 2 3011 STALL FREQUENCY Defines the frequency limit for the stall function See parameter 3010 STALL 20 FUNCTION 0 5 50 0 Hz Frequency 1 0 1 Hz 3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function See parameter 3010 STALL 20 FUNCTION 10 400 s Time 1 1s 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC Selects how the drive reacts to underload The protection wakes up if NOT SEL the motor torque falls below the curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal motor frequency and the above conditions have been valid longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive 0 FAULT The drive trips on fault UNDERLOAD and the motor coasts to a stop 1 Note Set parameter value to FAULT only after the drive ID run is performed I
362. tative parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter group is hidden Contact your local ABB representative 5022 Parameter is write protected Parameter value is read only and cannot be changed 5023 Parameter change is not allowed when drive is Stop drive and change parameter value running 5024 Drive is executing task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded or downloaded Wait until upload download is complete 5026 Value is at or below minimum limit Contact your local ABB representative 5027 Value is at or above maximum limit Contact your local ABB representative 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative Fault tracing 277 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5029 Memory is not ready Retry 5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative 5031 Drive is not ready for operation e g due to low DC Check input power supply voltage 5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter set Perform upload function before download is not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file does not fit into memory Contact your local ABB representative 5042 Parameter download error Selected parameter set Perform upload function before download is not in current parameter backup file 5043 No start inh
363. tenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 JOGGING ACTIVE Jogging function is active 22 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Control Word requested from fieldbus 0 No operation 27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus 0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus 28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus 0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus 30 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus 0 No start inhibit from fieldbus 31 Reserved Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 266 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 267 Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network via fieldbus adapter System overview The drive can be connected to an external control system via a fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus For embedded fieldbus control see chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter is connected to drive terminal X3 Fieldbus controller ACS350
364. ter signal 0171 SEQ CYCLE CNTR supervision 3202 SUPERV 1LIMLO 30 Supervision low limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 30 Supervision high limit 8401 SEQ PROG ENABLE EXT2 Sequence programming enabled in EXT2 8402 SEQ PROG START DI1 Sequence programming activation through digital input D11 8404 SEQ PROG RESET DI1 INV Sequence programming reset through inverted digital input DI1 INV 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 DI4 Logic value 1 8407 SEQ LOGIC OPER 1 AND Operation between logic value 1 and 2 8408 SEQ LOGIC VAL 2 DI5 Logic value 2 8415 CYCLE CNT LOC ST5 TO NEXT Sequence counter activation i e sequence count increases every time the state changes from state 5 to state 6 8416 CYCLE CNT RST STATE 1 Sequence counter reset during state transition to state 1 Program features 139 ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4 Additional Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting Par Setting information 8420 ST1 REF 50 8430 65 8440 60 8450 35 State reference SEL 8421 ST1 START FRW 8437 START 8441 START 8451 START Start stop and COMMANDS FRW FRW FRW direction commands 8422 ST1 0 2 ramp 8432 1 5s 8442 Os 8452 1 5s Acceleration RAMP pair 2 deceleration ramp time 8423 ST1 OUT R 0 D 0 8433 AO 0 8443 AO 0 8453 AO 0 Relay digital and CONTROL AO 0 analog output control 8424 ST1 Os 8434 2s 8444 0 2s 8454 2s State change delay CHANGE DLY 8425 ST1 T
365. ters 3201 3203 See parameter 8 group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 UNDER See selection SUPRV1 OVER 9 SUPRV2 OVER Status according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 See parameter 10 group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 UNDER See selection SUPRV2 OVER 11 SUPRV3 OVER Status according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 See parameter 12 group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 UNDER See selection SUPRV3 OVER 13 AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 14 Actual signals and parameters 169 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See parameter group 31 15 AUTOMATIC RESET FLT ALARM Fault or alarm 16 EXT CTRL Drive is under external control 17 REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use 18 CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 19 REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost 20 OVERCURRENT Alarm Fault by overcurrent protection function 21 OVERVOLTAGE Alarm Fault by overvoltage protection function 22 DRIVE TEMP Alarm Fault by drive overtemperature protection function 23 UNDERVOLTAGE Alarm Fault by undervoltage protection function 24 Al LOSS Analog input Al1 signal is lost 25 Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal is lost 26 MOTOR TE
366. ters are necessarily visible 5126 FB PAR 26 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed adapter module configuration parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE DONE Refreshing done 0 REFRESH Refreshing 1 Actual signals and parameters Parameters complete descriptions 225 Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not 1 allowed on line 1 247 Address 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link 9 6 9 6 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 1 0 1 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 115 2 kbit s 115 2 kbit s 5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit s The same setting must be used in all 8 NONE 1 on line stations 8 NONE 1 No parity bit one stop bit 0 8 NONE 2 No parity bit two stop bits 1 8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit one stop bit 2 8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit one stop bit 3 5204 OK MESSAGES Number of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation 0 this number increases constantly 0 65535 Number of messages 1 1 5205 PARITY ERRORS Number of characters with a parity error received from the Modbus link If the 0 number is high check that the parity set
367. the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive Use of warning symbols There are two types of safety warnings throughout this manual Danger electricity warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment f General danger warns about conditions other than those caused by Safety Installation and maintenance work A These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that 1 There is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground 2 There is no voltage between terminals BRK and BRK and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the input power of the dr
368. thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses the modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller See Exception codes on page 257 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 256 The following table gives information on the contents of the modbus addresses 40001 40012 and 40031 40034 Modbus register Access Information 40001 Control Word R W Control Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile i e when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal format 40002 Reference 1 R W External reference REF1 See section Fieldbus references on page 249 40003 Reference 2 R W External reference REF2 See section Fieldbus references on page 249 40004 Status Word Status Word Supported only by ABB Drives profile when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 shows a copy of the Control Word in hexadecimal format 40005 40012 Actual 1 8 Actual value 1 8 Use parameter 5310 5317 to selects an actual value to be mapped to modbus register 40005 40012 40031 Control Word LSW R W 0301 F
369. tic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC 61800 3 2004 See page 301 RoHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive RoHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Technical data 300 UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements UL checklist Input power connection See section nput power connection on page 296 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See section Supply disconnecting device on page 29 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 298 for specific limits Input cable fuses For installation in the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable si
370. time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods TIME PERIOD 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 TIME PERIOD 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 TIME PERIOD 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 TIME PERIOD 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 BOOSTER 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME TIMED FUNC 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIMED FUNC 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC TIMED FUNC 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC TIMED FUNC 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time TIMED FUNC 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIMED FUNC 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC aa 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1209 TIME MODE SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 4027 PID PARAM SET 4228 ACTIVATE 8402 SEQ PROG START 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 8425 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 ST 1 8 TRIG TO ST 2 8426 36 46 56 66 76 86 96 ST 1 8 TRIG TO ST N Program features 132 Example Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the air conditioning is on for
371. ting For example if 1103 REF is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value Al1 you can change its value to e g Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to Al1 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Step Action Display i Go to the Main menu by pressing Aw if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC U ae SETTINGS 1 DIGITAL INPUT DI C amp S and Ty 7 and pressing E ANALOG INPUTS Al RELAY OUTPUTS ROUT ANALOG OUTPUTS AOUT PANEL EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys Cas and S Y 7 and LOC USHOW 1 0 1 press lt After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the RECT STOP CEL selection ey DI3 EXIT 00 00 4 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys 45 and Y 7 LOC UPAR EDIT EDIT and press lt 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS DI1 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the setting with keys a and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1
372. tings 0x0000 0x0000 0xFFFF Value in format XXXY hex XXX Nominal current of the drive in Amperes An A indicates decimal point For example if XXX is 8A8 nominal current is 8 8 A Y Nominal voltage of the drive 1 1 phase 200 240 V 2 3 phase 200 240 V 4 3 phase 380 480 V 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Displays the version of the parameter table used in the drive 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel in display mode 103 3404 3405 0137 0138 Assistant panel 0139 0 101 172 Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED If 1 1 value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Display A value 3407 3406 3402 Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Source value X X Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See figure in parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting Actual signals and parameters 206 Parameters complete descriptions
373. tings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS Number of characters with a framing error received by the Modbus link If the 0 number is high check that the communication speed settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Number of characters which overflow the buffer i e number of characters 0 which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 0 65535 Number of characters 1 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received 0 by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 1 1 53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the address of the device Two units with the same address are not 1 allowed on line 0 247 Address 1 1 Actual signals and parameters 226 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link 9 6 9 6 9 6 kbit s 1 0 1 kbit s
374. tion DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run Enable signal Run 7 Disable i e control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller via the fieldbus adapter or embedded fieldbus modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 262 and ABB Drives communication profile on page 258 DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 O Run Enable 1 If Run Enable signal is switched on the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 1602 PARAMETERLOCK Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents parameter OPEN changing from control panel LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be 0 opened by entering the valid code to parameter 1603 PASS CODE The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by macros or fieldbus OPEN The lock is open Parameter values can be changed NOT SAVED Parameter changes made by control panel are not stored into the permanent 2 memory To store changed parameter values set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE 1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter
375. tion Def FbEq ms millisecond 62 Mrev millions of revolutions 63 d days 64 inwC inches of water column 65 m min meters per minute 66 N m Newton meter 67 ref reference in percentage 117 act actual value in percentage 118 dev deviation in percentage 119 LD load in percentage 120 SP set point in percentage 121 FBK feedback in percentage 122 lout output current in percentage 123 Vout output voltage 124 Fout output frequency 125 Tout output torque 126 Vdc DC voltage 127 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT X X Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT X X Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control panel in display 104 mode See par 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 172 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA E g 102 0102 SPEED 1 1 If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See par 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN MX Setting range depends on parameter
376. tion and correction on page 253 is applied before scaling Fieldbus scaling for ABB Drives profile 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 Reference F Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 28 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by R frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling Fieldbus scaling for DCU profile Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF 1 214783648 Speed or 1000 1 rpm 1 Hz Final reference limited by ee frequency 1104 1105 Actual motor 214783647 speed limited by 2001 2002 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 214783648 Speed or 1000 1 Final reference limited by i frequency 1107 1108 Actual motor
377. tion file error Contact your local ABB representative 630F 0306 bit 10 Fault tracing 281 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0028 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510 0306 bit 11 programmable fault function 3018 3019 Fieldbus communication break Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter Fieldbus contro with embedded fieldbus or appropriate fieldbus adapter manual Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate 0030 FORCE TRIP FF90 0306 bit 13 Trip command received from fieldbus See appropriate communication module manual 0034 MOTOR PHASE FF56 0306 bit 14 Motor circuit fault due to missing motor phase or motor thermistor relay used in motor temperature measurement fault Check motor and motor cable Check motor thermistor relay if used 0035 OUTP WIRING FF95 0306 bit 15 programmable fault function 3023 Incorrect input power and motor cable connection i e input power cable is connected to drive motor connection Check input power connections Check fault function parameters 0036 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630F 0307 bit 3 Loaded software is not compatible Contact your local ABB representative 0101 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 0103 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 0201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13
378. tivates the DC Hold or DC braking function NOT SEL 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Defines the DC hold speed 5 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC hold current 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time 0 2108 ISTART INHIBIT Enables the start inhibit function OFF 2109 EMER STOP SEL Selects the source for the external emergency stop command NOT SEL 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost 100 2111 STOP SIGNAL DLY Defines the stop signal delay time when parameter 2102 STOP 0 FUNCTION is set to SPEED COMP 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function 0 22 ACCEL DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal that DI5 selects between the two ramp pairs 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Defines the acceleration time 1 5 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Defines the deceleration time 1 5 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 0 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Defines the acceleration time 2 60 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Defines the deceleration time 2 60 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 0 2208 EMER DEC TIME Defines the time within the drive is stopped if an emergency stop 1 is activated 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL 23 SPEED CONTROL Speed controller variables 2301 PROP GAIN Defines a relative gain
379. to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Settings Parameter Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4122 4126 Sleep function settings Diagnostics Alarm Additional information PID SLEEP Sleep mode Parameter Additional information 1401 PID sleep function status through RO Program features 124 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors E El alt Al i N Motor me Motor ie gt GND A GND A A E E Fy e PN AO LAO z E x a De 1 GND a GND i 1 F 10nF F 10nF F WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature s
380. to the first state and all timers and outputs RO TO AO are set to zero Reset is possible only when sequence programming is stopped DI INV Reset through inverted digital input DI1 0 active 1 inactive 1 DI2 INV See selection DI1 INV 2 DI3 INV See selection DI1 INV 3 DI4 INV See selection DI1 INV 4 DI5 INV See selection DI1 INV 5 NOT SEL No reset signal 0 DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive 1 DI2 See selection DI1 2 DI3 See selection DI1 3 DI4 See selection DI1 4 DI5 See selection DI1 5 RESET Reset After reset parameter value is automatically set to NOT SEL 6 8405 SEQ ST FORCE Forces the sequence programming to a selected state STATE1 Note State is changed only when sequence programming is paused by parameter 8403 SEQ PROG PAUSE and this parameter is set to the selected state STATE 1 State is forced to state 1 1 STATE 2 State is forced to state 2 2 STATE 3 State is forced to state 3 3 STATE 4 State is forced to state 4 4 STATE 5 State is forced to state 5 5 STATE 6 State is forced to state 6 6 STATE 7 State is forced to state 7 7 Actual signals and parameters 230 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq STATE 8 State is forced to state 8 8 8406 SEQ LOGIC VAL 1 Defines the source for the logic value 1 Logic valu
381. to three signals from group 07 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE OPERATING DATA to be shown LOC UPAR EDIT Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the J TO RQU E parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE 105 Value 0 means that no signal is displayed CANCEL l 00 00 SAVE Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 2 Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number ora bar LOC PAR EDIT graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT DIRECT For details see parameter 3404 9 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameter 3417 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3478 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT HZ Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3 Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC UPAR EDIT display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For det
382. tom 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits 2001 MINIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed minimum speed 0 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Defines the allowed maximum speed Eur 1500 US 1800 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the allowed maximum motor current 1 82 12N 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE intermediate DC link 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE TIME intermediate DC link 2007 MINIMUM FREQ Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency 0 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Eur 50 US 60 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Selects the minimum torque limit for the drive MIN TORQUE 1 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Selects the maximum torque limit for the drive MAX TORQUE 1 2015 IMIN TORQUE 1 Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive 300 2016 IMIN TORQUE 2 Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive 300 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive 300 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive 300 2019 BRAKE CHOPPER Phased out parameter in sw version 2 51b and later 2020 BRAKE CHOPPER Selects the brake chopper control INBUILT 21 START STOP Start and stop modes of the motor 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor starting method AUTO 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop function COAST 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetising time 0 3 2104 DC HOLD CTL Ac
383. trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped The drive must be reset from control panel or from a source selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred during the trial time defined by parameter 3702 Last fault is reset only if the number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more Trial time 8 a t x Automatic reset X XK gt 0 5 Number of the automatic resets 1 1 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See parameter 3707 30 NR OF TRIALS 1 0 600 0 s Time 1 01s Actual signals and parameters 202 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an 0 automatic reset See parameter 3107 NR OF TRIALS If delay time is set to zero the drive resets immediately 0 0 120 0 s Time 1 01s 3104 AROVERCURRENT Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the overcurrent fault DISABLE Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by par 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive 0 ENABLE Active 1 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the intermediate link DISABLE overvoltage fault Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by par 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Inactive 0 ENABLE Active 1 3106 AR UNDE
384. trol or the 1 0 1 maximum speed with vector control If parameter value is set to zero the function is disabled The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 4305 BRAKE MAGN DELAY Defines motor magnetising time After start drive current torque speed is 0 frozen to the value defined by parameter 4302 BRAKE OPEN LVL or 4304 FORCED OPEN LVL for the set time 0 10000 ms Magnetising time If parameter value is set to zero the function is disabled 1 1ms Actual signals and parameters 224 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq 4306 RUNTIME FREQ LVL Defines the brake close speed When frequency falls below the set level 0 during run the brake is closed The brake is re opened when the requirements set by parameters 4301 4305 are met 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency with scalar control or the 1 0 1 maximum speed with vector control If parameter value is set to zero the function is disabled The control mode is selected by parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 50 ENCODER Encoder connection For more information see MTAC 01 Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AFE68591091 English 5001 PULSE NR States the number of encoder pulses per one revolution 1024 32 16384 ppr Pulse number in pulses per round ppr 1 1 5002 ENCODER ENABLE En
385. trol location 1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables rotation direction control as defined by parameters 1007 and REVERSE 1002 The direction control is explained in section Reference REQUEST handling on page 254 1010 JOGGING SEL COMM Enables jogging 1 or 2 activation through fieldbus 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL COMM Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection through fieldbus 1103 REF1 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Reference selection and correction for COMM AI1 DCU profile on page 249 1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as the active COMM AI1 control location See section Reference selection and correction for COMM AI1 DCU profile on page 249 OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION SEL COMM VALUE 1 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 COMM Enables relay output RO control by signal 0734 COMM RO WORD COMM 1 1501 AO1 CONTENT 135 i e 0135 Directs the contents of fieldbus reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 to analog output AO SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS 1601 RUN ENABLE COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Run Enable signal Run Disable 1604 FAULT RESET SEL COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal 1606 LOCAL LOCK COMM Selects fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock signal 1607 PARAM SAVE DONE SAVE Saves parameter value changes inclu
386. troller References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference indicating reversed direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as speed or frequency reference Actual Values Actual Values ACT are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Communication profile The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter supports the DCU communication profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits Fieldbus network Fieldbus adapter Drive Industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive Data 1 gt conversion lt ABB Drives Data 1 gt conversion lt lt Select gt lt gt _ gt es Transparent 16 gt 2 Optional reference actual value scaling Transparent 32 1 DCU profile 2 Selection via fieldbus adapter configuration parameters parameter group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Fieldbus control with fieldbus adapter 272 For DCU profile Control and Status Word contents see section DCU communication profile on page 262 Fieldbus references See section Fieldbus references on page 249 for DCU profile reference selection and correction reference scaling reference handling and actual v
387. ual signals and parameters 160 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq DI5 4 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction through 21 digital input DI4 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be REQUEST TIMER STOP Stop when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER DELAY has 22 passed Start with timer start signal Source for the signal is selected by parameter 1902 TIMER START TIMER START Start when timer delay defined by parameter 1901 TIMER DELAY has 23 passed Stop when timer is reset by parameter 1903 TIMER RESET COUNTER STOP Stop when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has 24 been exceeded Start with counter start signal Source for the signal is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND COUNTER START Start when counter limit defined by parameter 1905 COUNTER LIMIT has 25 been exceeded Stop with counter stop signal Source for the signal is selected by parameter 1911 CNTR S S COMMAND SEQ PROG Start stop and direction commands through sequence programming See 26 parameter group 84 SEQUENCE PROG 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines the connections and the source for the start stop and direction NOT SEL commands for external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotati
388. ue according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 See 36 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 OVER Logic value according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 See 37 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 OVER Logic value according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 See 38 parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 UNDER See selection SUPRV 1 OVER 39 SUPRV2 UNDER See selection SUPRV 2 OVER 40 SUPRV3 UNDER See selection SUPRV 3 OVER 41 SPV1OVRORDLY State change according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 or when 42 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SPV2OVRORDLY State change according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 or when 43 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SPV3OVRORDLY State change according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 or when 44 delay time defined by parameter 8424 ST1 CHANGE DLY has elapsed See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signals and parameters 236 Parameters complete descriptions Index Name Selection Description Def FbEq SPV1UNDORDLY See selection SPV1OVRORDLY 45 SPV2UNDORDLY See selection SPV2Z2OVRORDLY 46 SPV3UNDORDLY See selection SPV3UNDORDLY 47 CNTR OVER State change when counter value exceeds the limit defined by par 1905 48 COUNTER LIMIT See par
389. ulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor brake resistors and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses e Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath BICC General Corp Philsheath e Rockbestos Co Gardex e Oaknite CLX Shielded power cables are available from Belden LAPPKABEL LFLEX and Pirelli Planning electrical installation 34 Protecting the relay output contact and attenuating disturbances in case of inductive loads Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause voltage transients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If no
390. up contro with I O and ID Run 48 Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For gt ABB Motors C NA example if the motor nominal Si motor MZAA 200 MLA 4 speed is 1440 rpm on the No nameplate setting the value of Ins cl F IP_55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM v Hz kw rmin A cos ghann tE s SPEED to 1500 rpm results in seo Y 50 30 1475 325 0 83 i 400D 50 130 11475 56 10 83 the wrong operation of the drive eso Y 50 30 1470 34 0 83 380 V 380D 50 30 1470 59 0 83 supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 0 83 440D 60 35 1770 59 0 83 voltage Cat no 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 03 da 6210 03 180 kg gt IEC 34 1 ros motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 REM 9 9 O 5 PAR FWD motor nominal current parameter 9906 REM 9 9 O 6 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 lay A PAR FWD e motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 REM 9 9 O 7 PAR FWD e motor nominal speed parameter 9908 REM 9 9 O 8 PAR FWD e motor nominal power parameter 9909 REM 9 9 O 9 PAR FWD Select the motor identification method parameter 9910 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that para
391. vs external control 0000 e eee 97 Local Control aca Gane a ce ee Sea o e e ad ee hs wk 98 External controll usa ep are et ee ie Del ose ie OS Rat oe a Dees eat 98 SENS s a e a ad e AE ed Ree head a aed ie aie ee 98 RIE e ASI O E AE atts fp eaten nat te BRA ee Meaty ie th atta en e tenes ie Did 98 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 0 0 ccc eee eee 99 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 1 0 0 ccc ee eens 99 Reference types and processing 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee 100 SOMOS cyte A Weak weaned path OO EA A mid Peed bee eae ey eae 100 DiagGnOStCs cio a Rated we a AA oe Ge ee ed Te aoe eee eek 100 Reference trimming v2 wsraket oe pate Secale eh ge dede we Se ade WERE eae 101 OMITA A A eee eee A A A a 101 EXamMple arne A a E A a oe ie wag tale 102 Programmable analog inputs n n anaana ae 102 SOMOS e aca A E a Sl greeted E a E 102 Diagnostics einar e A A E le oem eke de 103 Programmable analog output 0 0 0 0 eee 103 A eet INR ke CN TRAN ee A ter NL A Ha eR te ce OS O xe ei cs 103 DiagGnOStCs eir lr kee eles els gate geet a A cele e elle eagle ied gta eo eg we 103 Programmable digital inputs s s tiraa medri teaa n oia ei a da eee 103 Settings A AA a ORS A a ha a E a TE 104 DISAgNOStOS roi a E E yan E E E A EA E Sees e 104 Programmable relay output 0 000 eee 104 Settings tata dhe do G4 awk be ae Maw Baas wh OE a BRE a gn o 104 DIaQnOSstics ii A A here ee es
392. well as in more complicated traverse applications The programming can be done with control panel or with a PC tool ACS350 is supported by version 2 50 or later version of the DriveWindow Light PC tool which includes a graphical Sequence Programming Tool Program features 134 Note As default all sequence programming parameters can be changed even when the sequence programming is active lt is recommended that after the sequence programming parameters are set parameters are locked by parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Settings Parameter Additional information 1001 1002 Start stop and direction commands for EXT1 EXT2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 selection 1106 REF2 source 1201 Constant speed deactivation Constant speed always overrides the sequence programming reference 1401 Sequence programming output through RO 1501 Sequence programming output through AO 1601 Run Enable activation deactivation 1805 Sequence programming output through DO 19 TIMER amp COUNTER State change according to counter limit 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed state change 2201 2207 Acceleration deceleration and ramp time settings 32 SUPERVISION Supervision settings 4010 4110 4210 Sequence programming output as PID reference signal 84 SEQUENCE PROG Sequence programming settings Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0167 Sequence programming status 0168 Sequence programming active state 0169
393. wn on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing Q The display briefly shows LoC before switching PA r to local control MENU FWD Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM 3 If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key LOC CAS or SY until you see rEF and then press 7 Now the display r E F shows the current reference value with under the value MENU FWD LOC Hz a FWD 4 To increase the reference value press lt A gt Loc 5 0 0 To decrease the reference value press w_ n ne The value changes immediately when you press the key It is stored in the ENG drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off Control panels Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can e view and change parameter values e select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode 63 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display le Go to the Main menu by pressing 7 if you are in the Output mode Loc otherwise by pressing CZ repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom r E F MENU FWD 2 If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key LOC CAS or _ until you see PAr and then pr
394. x 100 mA Q 21 DOOUT Aey No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 Al is used as a speed reference if vector mode is selected 2 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI3 DI4 Operation parameter O O Set speed through Al1 1 O Speed 1 1202 O 1 Speed 2 1203 1 1 Speed 3 1204 3 o ramp times according to parameters 2202 and 2203 1 ramp times according to parameters 2205 and 2206 4 360 degree grounding under a clamp Tightening torque 0 5 Num 4 4 Ibf in Application macros 88 3 wire macro This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three constant speeds To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 142 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 40 Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop buttons are disabled Default I O connections X1A 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen ie n En 2 Al Motor speed reference 0 10 V 1 10 kohm T 3 GND Analog input circuit common S 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA 5 Al2 Not in use by default 0 10 V 6 GND Analog input circuit common max 500 ohm 07 PT 7
395. xt state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state ST3 Drive is decelerated with Al1 10 Al1 60 50 reference and 0 s ramp time 1 State shifts to the next state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 0 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state ST4 Drive is decelerated with Al1 15 Al1 35 50 reference and 1 5 s ramp time State shifts to the next state when reference is reached If reference is not reached within 2 s state shifts to state 8 error state 2 ST5 Drive is accelerated with Al1 10 Al1 40 50 reference and O s ramp time 1 State shifts to the next state when reference is reached Sequence counter value is increased by 1 If sequence counter elapses state shifts to state 7 sequence completed ST6 Drive reference and ramp times are the same as in state 2 Drive state shifts immediately to state 2 delay time is 0 s ST7 sequence completed Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1 Digital output DO is activated If sequence programming is deactivated by falling edge of digital input DI1 state machine is reset to state 1 New start command can be activated by digital input DI1 or by digital inputs DI4 and DI5 both inputs DI4 and DI5 must be simultaneously active Program features 138 ST8 error state Drive is stopped with ramp pair 1 Relay output RO is activated If sequence programming is deactivated
396. y C Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft Switching frequency derating Derate according to the switching frequency used see parameter 2606 as follows Switching Drive voltage rating frequency Un 200 240 V Un 380 480 V 4 kHz No derating No derating 8 kHz Derate py to 90 Derate lzy to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 12 kHz Derate Ipy to 80 Derate 7y to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F 16 kHz Derate lzy to 75 Derate ly to 50 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Ensure that parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON which reduces the switching frequency if the drive s internal temperature is too high See parameter 2607 for details Technical data 292 Cooling air flow requirements The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS350 Main circuit Control cir
397. y 7 until you see CoPY C O PY MENU Press 7 Loc u L MENU FWD 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control LOC panel step to uL with keys lt 4 and Cw U L MENU FW Press S During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a LOC L 5 0 percentage of completion u To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A LOC d L A Download all is used as an example with keys a_ and SY 7 MENU Press Y 7 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a LOC d L 5 0 percentage of completion Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Fault tracing the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of the form A5xxx See section Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel on page 276 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Control panels 67 Assistant Control Panel Features The Assistant Control Panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display e language selection for the display e Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system e context sensitive help e real time clock Overview The following table summ
398. ylight saving changes Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise lt EXIT A by pressing EP repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME amp DATE on the menu with ENTER keys _ amp and S Y 7 and pressing wir LOC UTIME DATE CLOCK VISIBILITY TIME FORMAT DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL To new hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILI TY on the menu press Select Show clock Hide clock and press or if you want to return to the previous display without making changes press w e To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press and select a suitable format Press SS to save or EP to cancel your changes e To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press and select a suitable format Press to save or EPS to cancel your changes To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press Specify the hours with keys AS and E and press lt Then specify the minutes Press to save or EF to cancel your changes LOC UCLOCK_ VISIB 1 Hide cloc EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UU DATE _FORMAT 1 dd mm Yyyy mm dd yyyy CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC UTIME_FORMAT 1 12 hour CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC USET TIME h
399. zes and fuses on page 293 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 293 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 32 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the power cables on page 38 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US Braking The drive has an internal brake chopper When applied with appropriately sized brake resistors the brake chopper will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Brake resistor selection is discussed in section Brake resistors on page 302 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying dome

EN / ACS350 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents